Sony HT-CT780, HT-CT380 Operating instructions

Sony HT-CT780, HT-CT380 Operating instructions
Sound Bar
Operating Instructions
GB
AR
HT-CT380/CT780
HT-CT380
TRA
REGISTERED No: ER37065/15
DEALER No: DA0096946/12
HT-CT780
TRA
REGISTERED No: ER37064/15
DEALER No: DA0096946/12
WARNING
Do not install the appliance in a
confined space, such as a bookcase or
built-in cabinet.
To reduce the risk of fire, do not cover
the ventilation opening of the appliance
with newspapers, tablecloths, curtains,
etc.
Do not expose the appliance to naked
flame sources (for example, lighted
candles).
To reduce the risk of fire or electric
shock, do not expose this appliance to
dripping or splashing, and do not place
objects filled with liquids, such as vases,
on the appliance.
The unit is not disconnected from the
mains as long as it is connected to the
AC outlet, even if the unit itself has been
turned off.
As the main plug is used to disconnect
the unit from the mains, connect the
unit to an easily accessible AC outlet.
Should you notice an abnormality in the
unit, disconnect the main plug from the
AC outlet immediately.
2GB
Do not expose batteries or appliances
with battery-installed to excessive heat,
such as sunshine and fire.
Indoor use only.
Recommended cables
Properly shielded and grounded cables
and connectors must be used for
connection to host computers and/or
peripherals.
For the Bar Speaker
The nameplate is located on the
bottom.
Copyrights and Trademarks
This system incorporates Dolby* Digital
and the DTS** Digital Surround System.
* Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
** For DTS patents, see http://
patents.dts.com. Manufactured
under license from DTS Licensing
Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, &
DTS and the Symbol together are
registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.
© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
The BLUETOOTH® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by Sony Corporation is under
license.
This system incorporates HighDefinition Multimedia Interface
(HDMI™) technology.
The terms HDMI and HDMI HighDefinition Multimedia Interface, and the
HDMI Logo are trademarks or registered
trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC in the
United States and other countries.
The N Mark is a trademark or registered
trademark of NFC Forum, Inc. in the
United States and in other countries.
Android™ and Google Play™ are
trademarks of Google Inc.
Apple, the Apple logo, iPhone, iPod, and
iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other
countries. App Store is a service mark of
Apple Inc.
“ClearAudio+” is a trademark of Sony
Corporation.
“x.v.Colour” and “x.v.Colour” logo are
trademarks of Sony Corporation.
“PlayStation®” is a registered trademark
of Sony Computer Entertainment Inc.
Other trademarks and trade names are
those of their respective owners.
“Made for iPod,” and “Made for iPhone”
mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to
iPod or iPhone, respectively, and has
been certified by the developer to meet
Apple performance standards. Apple is
not responsible for the operation of this
device or its compliance with safety and
regulatory standards. Please note that
the use of this accessory with iPod or
iPhone may affect wireless
performance.
Compatible iPod/iPhone models
The compatible iPod/iPhone models
are as follows. Update your iPod/iPhone
with the latest software before using
with the system.
BLUETOOTH technology works with:
iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6/iPhone 5s/
iPhone 5c/iPhone 5/iPhone 4s/
iPhone 4/iPhone 3GS
iPod touch (5th generation)/iPod touch
(4th generation)
“BRAVIA” logo is a trademark of Sony
Corporation.
“DSEE” is a trademark of Sony
Corporation.
3GB
GB
About these operating
instructions
• The instructions in these Operating
Instructions describe the controls on
the remote control. You can also use
the controls on the main unit if they
have the same or similar names as
those on the remote control.
• Some illustrations are presented as
conceptual drawings, and may be
different from the actual products.
4GB
Table of Contents
Connecting  Startup Guide (separate document)
About these operating
instructions .......................... 4
Listening
Listening to sound from a TV,
Blu-ray Disc™ player, cable/
satellite box, etc. ................. 6
Listening to music from a
BLUETOOTH device ............. 6
Sound Adjustment
Enjoying sound effects (Sports
mode, etc.) .......................... 9
BLUETOOTH Functions
Controlling the system using a
smartphone or tablet
device (SongPal) .................10
Viewing Copyright-protected
4K Content (HT-CT780 only)
Saving power in standby
mode ................................... 19
Mounting the Bar Speaker on
a wall .................................. 20
Installing the subwoofer
horizontally (HT-CT380
only) ....................................22
Linking the system (Link to the
subwoofer) .........................22
Additional Information
Precautions ...............................23
Troubleshooting ...................... 24
Guide to parts and controls .... 29
Supported audio formats .........33
Specifications ...........................35
On BLUETOOTH
communication ..................37
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT ....................... 38
Connecting to a 4K TV and 4K
devices ............................. 12
Settings and Adjustments
Using the setup display ........ 14
Other Functions
Using the Control for HDMI
function ............................... 17
Using “BRAVIA” Sync
features ............................... 18
Using the parental lock
function ............................... 19
5GB
Listening
Listening to music from a
BLUETOOTH device
Listening to sound from a
TV, Blu-ray Disc™ player,
cable/satellite box, etc.
Press INPUT repeatedly.
When you press INPUT once, the current
device appears on the front display,
then each time you press INPUT, the
device changes cyclically as follows.
[TV]  [HDMI 1]  [HDMI 2]  [HDMI 3]
 [ANALOG]  [BT]
[TV]
Digital device that is connected to the
DIGITAL IN (TV) jack or TV compatible with
the Audio Return Channel function that is
connected to HDMI OUT (ARC) jack
[HDMI 1] [HDMI 2] [HDMI 3]
Blu-ray Disc player, etc. that is connected to
the HDMI IN 1, 2, or 3 jack
[ANALOG]
Analog device that is connected to the
ANALOG IN jack
[BT]
BLUETOOTH device that supports A2DP
Pairing this system with a
BLUETOOTH device
Pairing is the process required to create
a link between BLUETOOTH devices to
allow wireless connection. You must
pair a device with the system before you
start using the system.
Once BLUETOOTH devices are paired,
there is no need to pair them again.
1
2
Tip
• If the BLUETOOTH functions are disabled,
[BT OFF] appears instead of [BT].
3
Press PAIRING on the system.
The BLUETOOTH indicator (blue)
flashes quickly during BLUETOOTH
pairing.
Turn on the BLUETOOTH function
on the BLUETOOTH device, search
for devices and select this system
(HT-CT380 or HT-CT780).
If a Passkey is requested, enter
“0000.”
Make sure that the BLUETOOTH
indicator (blue) lights up.
Connection has been established.
Note
• You can pair up to 9 BLUETOOTH
devices. If the 10th BLUETOOTH
device is paired, the least recently
connected device will be replaced by
the new one.
6GB
Tip
Compatible remote devices
Remote devices with a built-in NFC
function
(OS: Android 2.3.3 or later, excluding
Android 3.x)
1
Download, install, and start the
“NFC Easy Connect” application.
Listening to music of the
registered device
Note
1
2
3
4
Press INPUT repeatedly to display
[BT].
The BLUETOOTH indicator (blue)
flashes during attempting
BLUETOOTH pairing.
• The application may not be available
in some countries/regions.
2
Hold the remote device near to
the N-Mark on the system until the
remote device vibrates.
On the BLUETOOTH device, select
this system (HT-CT380 or
HT-CT780).
Make sure that the BLUETOOTH
indicator (blue) lights up.
Start playback on the BLUETOOTH
device.
Connecting to a BLUETOOTH
device by One-touch
functions (NFC)
By holding an NFC-compatible remote
device near to the N-Mark on the
system, the system and remote device
proceed to complete pairing and the
BLUETOOTH connection automatically.
3
Make sure that the BLUETOOTH
indicator (blue) lights up.
Connection has been established.
Notes
• You can connect only one device at a
time.
• Depending on a smartphone, you may
need to set the NFC function to on
beforehand. Refer to the operating
instructions of the smartphone.
7GB
Listening
• Once the BLUETOOTH connection is
established, an indication
recommending which application to
download will be displayed,
according to what equipment you
have connected. Following the
instructions displayed, an application
called “SongPal,” which will enable
you to operate this system, can be
downloaded. Refer to “Controlling
the system using a smartphone or
tablet device (SongPal)” (page 10).
Tip
• If pairing and the BLUETOOTH connection
fail, do the following.
– Relaunch “NFC Easy Connect” and move
the remote device slowly over the
N-Mark.
– Remove the case from the remote
device if using a commercially available
remote device case.
8GB
Setting the Night mode
Sound Adjustment
Enjoying sound effects
(Sports mode, etc.)
Selecting the sound field
Press SOUND FIELD repeatedly until
the desired sound field appears on
the front panel display.
[CLEARAUDIO+]
The suitable sound setting is automatically
selected for the sound source.
[STANDARD]
Corresponds to every source.
[MOVIE]
Sounds are played back with surround
effects, and they are realistic and powerful,
making them suitable for movies.
Press NIGHT to display [N. ON].
To inactivate the Night mode, press
NIGHT to display [N. OFF].
Setting the Voice mode
The Voice mode helps make dialogs
clearer.
Press VOICE repeatedly to display the
desired type.
[TYPE 1]
Dialog range is outputted directly.
[TYPE 2]
Dialog range is stressed.
[TYPE 3]
The range of dialogue is highlighted, and in
treble parts with low volume difficult to be
discerned by the elderly are boosted.
[SPORTS]
Commentary is clear, cheers are heard as
surround-sound, and sounds are realistic.
[GAME]
Sounds are powerful and realistic, suitable
for game play.
[MUSIC]
Sounds are played back to suit to a music
program, music Blu-ray Disc, or DVD.
[P.AUDIO (Portable audio)]
Sounds are played back to suit to a portable
music player using DSEE*.
* DSEE stands for Digital Sound
Enhancement Engine, a high range
compensation and fine sound restoration
technology developed independently by
Sony.
9GB
Sound Adjustment
You can easily enjoy pre-programmed
sound fields that are tailored to different
kinds of sound sources.
Sounds are played back enhanced with
sound effects and clarity of dialog.
5
BLUETOOTH Functions
Controlling the system
using a smartphone or
tablet device (SongPal)
“SongPal” is the application to operate
the system with your smartphone or
tablet, etc.
“SongPal” is available from either
Google Play or App Store.
This function is enabled by setting [BT
PWR] to [ON] (page 15). The default
setting is [ON].
6
2
3
Press / (on/standby) on the
remote control.
The display of the Bar Speaker lights
up.
Search for “SongPal” with the
Android device and download
that application.
Run “SongPal” then follow the onscreen instructions.
Tip
• If the display for NFC connection
appears, see “One-Touch connection
using the Android device with the
NFC function built-in (NFC).”
4
After the BLUETOOTH connection
display appears on the Android
device, press PAIRING.
The BLUETOOTH indicator (blue)
flashes quickly during BLUETOOTH
pairing.
10GB
Operate the system with the
display of the connected Android
device.
One-Touch connection using the
Android device with the NFC
function built-in (NFC)
1
2
When using an Android
device
1
Select this system (HT-CT380 or
HT-CT780) from the BLUETOOTH
device list of the Android device.
When the connection has been
established, the BLUETOOTH
indicator (blue) lights up.
3
Perform steps 1 to 3 of “When
using an Android device.”
After the BLUETOOTH connection
display appears on the Android
device, touch the Android device
with the N-Mark on the Bar
Speaker.
When the connection has been
established, the BLUETOOTH
indicator (blue) lights up.
Operate the system with the
display of the Android device.
When using an iPhone/iPod
touch
1
2
Press / (on/standby) on the
remote control.
The display of the Bar Speaker lights
up.
Press PAIRING.
The BLUETOOTH indicator (blue)
flashes quickly during BLUETOOTH
pairing.
3
5
Search for “SongPal” with the
connected iPhone/iPod touch and
download that application.
BLUETOOTH Functions
4
Set the iPhone/iPod touch to
pairing mode and select this
system (HT-CT380 or HT-CT780)
from the BLUETOOTH device list
on the iPhone/iPod touch.
When the connection has been
established, the BLUETOOTH
indicator (blue) of the Bar Speaker
lights up.
Run “SongPal” then operate the
system with the display of the
iPhone/iPod touch.
11GB
Viewing Copyright-protected 4K Content (HT-CT780 only)
Connecting to a 4K TV and 4K devices
To view copyright-protected 4K content, connect the devices via an HDCP 2.2compatible HDMI jack on each end. Copyright-protected 4K content can be viewed
only by a connection via HDCP 2.2-compatible HDMI jacks. Refer to the TV’s
operating instructions as to whether or not the HDMI jack on the TV is HDCP 2.2compatible.
When the TV’s HDMI jack is HDCP 2.2-compatible and labeled
with ARC
Blu-ray Disc player, cable
box or satellite box, etc.
HDCP 2.2compatible
HDMI jack
HDCP 2.2compatible
HDMI jack
 HDMI cable (High Speed type, not
supplied)
 HDMI cable (High Speed type, not
supplied)
Tips
• The HDMI 1 INPUT jack of the Bar Speaker is compatible with HDCP 2.2.
• The ARC (Audio Return Channel) function sends digital sound from a TV to this system or
an AV amplifier using just an HDMI cable.
12GB
When the TV’s HDMI jack is HDCP 2.2-compatible and not
labeled with ARC
Connect the optical digital cable to the optical output jack of the TV, and an HDMI
cable to the HDCP 2.2-compatible HDMI input jack.
Blu-ray Disc player, cable
box or satellite box, etc.
HDCP 2.2compatible
HDMI jack
Viewing Copyright-protected 4K Content (HT-CT780 only)
HDCP 2.2compatible
HDMI jack
 Optical digital cable (supplied)
 HDMI cable (High Speed type, not supplied)
 HDMI cable (High Speed type, not supplied)
Tip
• The HDMI 1 INPUT jack of the Bar Speaker is compatible with HDCP 2.2.
13GB
Settings and Adjustments
Using the setup display
You can set the following items with the menu.
Your settings are retained even if you disconnect the AC power cord (mains lead).
1
2
3
Press MENU to turn on the menu on the front panel display.
Press BACK/  (select)/ENTER repeatedly to select the item and press ENTER
to decide the setting.
Press MENU to turn off the menu.
Menu list
The default settings are underlined.
Menu items
Function
[LEVEL]
(Level)
[DRC]
(Dynamic range
control)
Useful for enjoying movies at low sound volume. DRC
applies to Dolby Digital sources.
• [ON]: Compresses sound in accordance with the
information contained in the content.
• [AUTO]: Automatically compresses sound encoded in
Dolby TrueHD.
• [OFF]: Sound is not compressed.
[TONE]
(Tone)
[BASS]
(Bass)
Adjusts the bass level.
• The parameters range from [–6] to [+6] in 1-step
increments.
[TREBLE]
(Treble)
Adjusts the treble level.
• The parameters range from [–6] to [+6] in 1-step
increments.
[SYNC] (AV sync)
You can adjust the sound when the image and the sound
are not in sync.
• [ON]: Turns on the AV Sync function.
• [OFF]: Turns off the AV Sync function.
[DUAL]
(Dual mono)
You can enjoy multiplex broadcast sound when the system
receives a Dolby Digital multiplex broadcast signal.
• [M/S]: Main sound is output from the left speaker and sub
sound is output from the right speaker.
• [MAIN]: Outputs only the main channel.
• [SUB]: Outputs only the sub channel.
[EFFECT]
(Sound effect)
• [ON]: The sound of the selected sound field is played. It is
recommended to use this setting.
• [OFF]: The input source is down-mixed for 2 channels.
[AUDIO]
(Audio)
Note
• Even if [EFFECT] is set to [OFF], [EFFECT] is automatically set
to [ON] when you change the sound field setting.
14GB
Menu items
Function
[AUDIO]
(Audio)
[STREAM]
(Stream)
Shows the current audio stream information.
See page 34 on the supported audio formats.
[HDMI]
[CTRL]
(Control for HDMI)
• [ON]: Turns on the Control for HDMI function.
• [OFF]: Turns off the function. Select this setting when you
want to connect a device not compatible with the Control
for HDMI function.
[S. THRU]
(Standby-through)
You can set the power saving mode of the HDMI standbythrough function.
• [AUTO]: Outputs signals from the HDMI OUT jack of the
system in standby mode according to the status of the TV.
This setting saves power in standby mode compared with
the [ON] setting.
• [ON]: Always outputs signals from the HDMI OUT jack in
standby mode. If any TV other than “BRAVIA” is connected,
use the system with the [ON] setting.
Note
[ARC]
(Audio Return
Channel)
Set this item to listen to digital sound from a TV compatible
with the Audio Return Channel (ARC) technology that is
connected using a High Speed HDMI cable.
• [ON]: Turns on the ARC function.
• [OFF]: Turns off the ARC function.
Note
• This item appears only when [CTRL] is set to [ON].
[SET BT]
[BT PWR]
(Set
(BLUETOOTH
BLUETOOTH) power)
Turns on or off the BLUETOOTH function of this system.
• [ON]: Turns on the BLUETOOTH function.
• [OFF]: Turns off the BLUETOOTH function.
Note
• If you change the setting to [OFF], the BLUETOOTH
function is disabled.
[BT.STBY]
(BLUETOOTH
standby)
When the system has pairing information, the system is in
BLUETOOTH standby mode even when it is turned off.
• [ON]: BLUETOOTH standby mode is enabled.
• [OFF]: BLUETOOTH standby mode is disabled.
Note
• If the system does not have pairing information,
BLUETOOTH standby mode cannot be set.
[AAC]
(Advanced audio
coding)
You can set whether or not the system uses AAC via
BLUETOOTH.
• [ON]: The system uses AAC via BLUETOOTH.
• [OFF]: The system does not use it.
Note
• If you change the setting when the system is connected
with a BLUETOOTH device, the system will be
disconnected from the device.
15GB
Settings and Adjustments
• This item appears only when [CTRL] is set to [ON].
Menu items
[SYSTEM]
(System)
[WS]
(Wireless
sound)
Function
[A. STBY]
(Auto standby)
You can reduce power consumption. The system enters
standby mode automatically when you do not operate the
system for about 20 minutes and the system is not receiving
an input signal.
• [ON]: Turns on the auto standby function.
• [OFF]: Turns off the function.
[VER] (Version)
The current firmware version information appears on the
front panel display.
[SYS.RST]
(System reset)
You can reset menus and settings (sound fields, etc.) of the
system to the initial status when it does not work properly
(page 28).
[UPDATE]*
(Update)
Updates will be announced on the Sony website. Update the
system following the instructions on the website.
[LINK]
You can link the wireless sound system again (page 22).
[RF CHK]
(RF check)
You can check whether the wireless sound system of the
system can communicate or not.
• [OK]: The wireless sound system is working.
• [NG]: The wireless sound system is not working.
* HT-CT780 only
16GB
Other Functions
Using the Control for
HDMI function
By using the Control for HDMI function,
and connecting a device that is
compatible with the Control for HDMI
function via an HDMI cable (High Speed
type), operation is simplified with the
features below.
The Control for HDMI function is
enabled by setting [CTRL (Control for
HDMI)] to [ON] (page 15). The default
setting is [ON].
System Power Off
When you turn off the TV, the system
and the connected device will turn off
automatically.
System Audio Control
If you turn on the system while you are
watching the TV, the TV sound will be
output from the speakers of the system
automatically.
The volume of the system will be
adjusted when you adjust the volume
using the TV’s remote control.
If the TV sound was output from the
speakers of the system the last time you
watched the TV, the system will be
turned on automatically when you turn
on the TV again.
One-Touch Play
When you activate the device (Blu-ray
Disc player, “PlayStation®4,” etc.)
connected to the system with a High
Speed HDMI cable, the connected TV is
turned on automatically and the
input signal of the system is switched to
the appropriate HDMI input.
Home Theatre Control
If a Home Theatre Control-compatible
TV is connected to the system, the
system menu appears on the connected
TV. You can switch an input of the
system or switch sound fields by using
the remote control of your TV. You can
also adjust the settings of voice level,
subwoofer volume, treble, bass, night
mode, Dual Mono, or A/V Sync.
Your TV must be able to access a
broadband service to use the Home
Theatre Control function.
Notes
• The above features may not operate with
certain device.
• Depending on the settings of the
connected device, the Control for HDMI
function may not work correctly. Refer to
the operating instructions of the device.
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
If the TV is compatible with the Audio
Return Channel (ARC) technology, an
HDMI cable connection will allow you to
17GB
Other Functions
Control for HDMI is a mutual control
function standard used by HDMI CEC
(Consumer Electronics Control) for HDMI
(High-Definition Multimedia Interface).
listen to the TV sound from the speakers
of the system.
The ARC function is enabled by setting
[ARC (Audio return channel)] to [ON]
(page 15). The default setting is [ON].
Using “BRAVIA” Sync
features
The original Sony functions listed below
can also be used with products that are
compatible with “BRAVIA” Sync.
Power save
If a “BRAVIA” Sync-compatible TV is
connected to the system, the power
consumption will be reduced in standby
mode by stopping HDMI signal
transmission when the TV is turned off
with the HDMI standby-through
function* of the system set to [AUTO]
(page 15). The default setting is [AUTO].
If any TV other than “BRAVIA” is
connected, set the item to [ON]
(page 15).
* The HDMI standby-through function is
used to output the signals from the HDMI
OUT jack of this system even if it is in
standby mode.
Notes on HDMI connections
• Use a High Speed HDMI cable. If you
use a Standard HDMI cable, 1080p,
Deep Color, 3D, and 4K content may
not be displayed properly.
• Use an HDMI-authorized cable.
Use a Sony High Speed HDMI cable
with the Cable Type Logo.
• We do not recommend using an
HDMI-DVI conversion cable.
• Check the setup of the connected
equipment if an image is poor or the
sound does not come out of the
equipment connected via the HDMI
cable.
• Audio signals (sampling frequency, bit
length, etc.) transmitted from an HDMI
jack may be suppressed by the
connected equipment.
• Sound may be interrupted when the
sampling frequency or the number of
18GB
channels of audio output signals from
the playback equipment is switched.
• If the connected equipment is not
compatible with copyright-protection
technology (HDCP), the image and/or
the sound from the HDMI OUT jack of
this system may be distorted or may
not be output. In such a case, check
the specifications of the connected
equipment.
• When “TV” is selected as the input
source of the system, video signals via
one of the HDMI IN 1/2/3 jacks
selected last time are output from the
HDMI OUT jack.
• This system supports Deep Color,
“x.v.Colour,” 3D, and 4K transmission.
• To enjoy 3D content, connect a 3Dcompatible TV and video equipment
(Blu-ray Disc player, “PlayStation®4,”
etc.) to the system using High Speed
HDMI cables, put on 3D glasses, and
then play back a 3D-compatible Bluray Disc, etc.
• To enjoy 4K content, the TV and
players that are connected to the
system must be compatible with 4K
content.
Using the parental lock
function
Saving power in standby
mode
Buttons on the Bar Speaker, except for
the / (on/standby) button, will be
disabled.
Check that you have made the following
settings:
– [CTRL] in [HDMI] is set to [OFF]
(page 15).
– [S. THRU] in [HDMI] to [AUTO]
(page 15).
Press INPUT on the Bar Speaker for
about 5 seconds when the system is
on.
[LOCKED] appears on the display.
To cancel the parental lock function,
press INPUT again for about 5 seconds
to display [UNLOCK].
Other Functions
19GB
Mounting the Bar
Speaker on a wall
You can mount the Bar Speaker on a
wall.
Notes
• Prepare screws (not supplied) that are
suitable for the wall material and
strength. As a plasterboard wall is
especially fragile, attach the screws
securely to two studs in the wall beam.
Install the Bar Speaker horizontally, hung
by screws in studs in a continuous flat
section of the wall.
• Be sure to subcontract the installation to
Sony dealers or licensed contractors and
pay special attention to safety during the
installation.
• Sony shall not be held responsible for
accidents or damage caused by improper
installation, insufficient wall strength,
improper screw installation or natural
calamity, etc.
1
Fix the supplied wall mounting
brackets to the bracket fixing
holes on the bottom of the Bar
Speaker with the supplied screws
so that the surface of each wall
mounting bracket is as shown in
the illustration.
Fix the two wall mounting brackets
to the left and right fixing holes on
the bottom of the Bar Speaker.
Illustrative example: HT-CT780
AC power cord (mains lead)
Screw (supplied)
Wall mounting bracket
(supplied)
20GB
2
Prepare screws (not supplied) that
are suitable for the holes in the
brackets.
4 mm
4
Hang the Bar Speaker on the
screws.
Align the holes in the brackets with
the screws, then hang the Bar
Speaker on the two screws.
More than 30 mm
4.5 mm
10 mm
Hole in the bracket
Fasten the screws to 2 studs in the
wall.
The screws should protrude by
5 mm to 6 mm.
Other Functions
3
777.5 mm (HT-CT380)
876 mm (HT-CT780)
5 mm to
6 mm
21GB
Installing the subwoofer
horizontally (HT-CT380
only)
Place the subwoofer on the right side
with the “SONY” logo facing front.
Linking the system (Link
to the subwoofer)
Set up the wireless subwoofer
connection again.
1
2
3
4
5
Attach the supplied speaker pads.
6
22GB
Press MENU.
Select [WS] with   (select), then
press ENTER.
Select [LINK] with   (select), then
press ENTER.
When [START] appears on the
display, press ENTER.
[SEARCH] appears, and the Bar
Speaker searches for a device that
can be used with Link. Proceed to
the next step within 1 minute.
To quit the Link function while
searching for a device, press BACK.
Press LINK on the subwoofer.
The on/standby indicator on the
subwoofer lights up in green. [OK]
appears on the display of the Bar
Speaker.
If [FAILED] appears, check to ensure
the subwoofer is turned on and
perform the process again from
step 1.
Press MENU.
The menu turns off.
Additional Information
Precautions
On safety
• Should any solid object or liquid fall into
the system, unplug the system and have
it checked by qualified personnel before
operating it any further.
• Do not climb on the Bar Speaker and
subwoofer, as you may fall down and
injure yourself, or system damage may
result.
On power sources
On heat buildup
Although the system heats up during
operation, this is not a malfunction.
If you continuously use this system at high
volume, the system temperature at the
rear and bottom rises considerably. To
avoid burning yourself, do not touch the
system.
On placement
• Place the system in a location with
adequate ventilation to prevent heat
On operation
Before connecting other equipment, be
sure to turn off and unplug the system.
If you encounter color irregularity
on a nearby TV screen
Color irregularities may be observed on
certain types of TV.
• If color irregularity is observed...
Turn off the TV, then turn it on again after
15 to 30 minutes.
• If color irregularity is observed again...
Place the system further away from the
TV.
On cleaning
Clean the system with a soft, dry cloth. Do
not use any type of abrasive pad, scouring
powder, or solvent such as alcohol or
benzine.
If you have any question or problem
concerning your system, please consult
your nearest Sony dealer.
23GB
Additional Information
• Before operating the system, check that
the operating voltage is identical to your
local power supply. The operating voltage
is indicated on the nameplate on the
bottom of the Bar Speaker.
• If you are not going to use the system for
a long time, be sure to disconnect the
system from the wall outlet (mains). To
disconnect the AC power cord (mains
lead), grasp the plug itself; never pull the
cord.
• One blade of the plug is wider than the
other for the purpose of safety and will fit
into the wall outlet (mains) only one way.
If you are unable to insert the plug fully
into the outlet, contact your dealer.
• AC power cord (mains lead) must be
changed only at a qualified service shop.
buildup and prolong the life of the
system.
• Do not place the system near heat
sources or in a place subject to direct
sunlight, excessive dust, or mechanical
shock.
• Do not place anything at the rear of the
Bar Speaker and subwoofer that might
block the ventilation holes and cause
malfunctions.
• If the system is being used in combination
with a TV, VCR, or tape deck, noise may
result and picture quality may suffer. In
such a case, place the system away from
the TV, VCR, or tape deck.
• Use caution when placing the system on a
surface that has been specially treated
(with wax, oil, polish, etc.), as staining or
discoloration of the surface may result.
• Take care to avoid any possible injury
from the corners of the Bar Speaker and
subwoofer.
• Keep 3 cm or more space under the Bar
Speaker when you hang it on a wall.
Troubleshooting
If you experience any of the following
difficulties while using the system, use
this troubleshooting guide to help
remedy the problem before requesting
repairs. Should any problem persist,
consult your nearest Sony dealer.
General
The power does not turn on.
 Check that the AC power cord
(mains lead) is connected securely.
The system does not work normally.
 Disconnect the AC power cord
(mains lead) from the wall outlet
(mains), then reconnect after
several minutes.
The system is turned off automatically.
 The auto standby function is
working. Set [A. STBY] in [SYSTEM]
to [OFF] (page 16).
Sound
No TV sound is output from the system.
 Repeatedly press the INPUT button
on the remote control to display
[TV] on the display (refer to the
supplied Startup Guide).
 Turn on the TV first, then the
system. Set the speakers setting of
the TV (BRAVIA) to Audio System.
Refer to the operating instructions
of the TV for the TV setting.
 Check the connection of the HDMI
cable, optical digital cable, or audio
cable that is connected to the
system and the TV (refer to the
supplied Startup Guide).
 Increase the volume on the TV or
cancel muting.
24GB
 When a TV compatible with the
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
technology is connected with an
HDMI cable, make sure the cable is
connected to the HDMI input (ARC)
terminal of the TV. If sound is still
not output or is dropped, connect
the supplied optical digital cable
and set [ARC] to [OFF] in the menu
(page 15). (Refer to the supplied
Startup Guide regarding the
connection.)
 If the TV is not compatible with the
Audio Return Channel (ARC)
technology, connect the optical
digital cable. TV sound is not output
via an HDMI connection (refer to the
supplied Startup Guide).
 If no sound is output from an optical
digital output jack or the TV does
not have an optical digital output
jack, connect the cable box or
satellite box directly to the DIGITAL
IN (TV) jack of the system.
The sound is output from both the
system and the TV.
 Turn off the sound of the TV.
The TV sound from this system lags
behind the image.
 If [SYNC] is set to [ON], set it to [OFF]
(page 14).
 When you are watching movies, you
may hear the sound with a slight
delay from the image.
No sound or only a very low-level
sound of the device connected to the
Bar Speaker is heard from the Bar
Speaker.
 Press the  (volume) + button on
the remote control and check the
volume level (page 29).
 Press the  (muting) or 
(volume) + button on the remote
control to cancel the muting
function (page 29).
 Make sure the input source is
selected correctly. You should try
other input sources by pressing the
INPUT button on the remote control
several times (page 6).
 Check that all the cables and cords
of the system and the connected
device are firmly inserted.
The surround effect cannot be
obtained.
 Depending on the input signal and
the sound field setting, surround
sound processing may not work
effectively. The surround effect may
be subtle, depending on the
program or disc.
 To play multi channel audio, check
the digital audio output setting on
the device connected to the system.
For details, refer to the operating
instructions supplied with the
connected device.
BLUETOOTH connection cannot be
completed.
 Make sure that the BLUETOOTH
indicator (blue) is lit (page 29).
System status
BLUETOOTH
indicator
(blue)
During BLUETOOTH
pairing
Flashes quickly
The system is attempting Flashes
to connect with a
BLUETOOTH device
The system has
established connection
with a BLUETOOTH
device
Lit
The system is in
BLUETOOTH standby
mode (when the system
is off)
Unlit
 Make sure the BLUETOOTH device
to be connected is turned on and
the BLUETOOTH function is
enabled.
 Bring this system and the
BLUETOOTH device closer together.
 Pair this system and the
BLUETOOTH device again. You may
need to cancel the pairing with this
system using your BLUETOOTH
device first.
 If [BT PWR] of the system is set to
[OFF], set to [ON] (page 15).
Pairing cannot be achieved.
 Bring this system and the
BLUETOOTH device closer together
(page 6).
 Make sure this system is not
receiving interference from a
wireless LAN equipment, other
2.4 GHz wireless devices, or a
microwave oven. If a device that
generates electromagnetic
25GB
Additional Information
No sound or only a very low-level
sound is heard from the subwoofer.
 Press the SW (subwoofer
volume) + button on the remote
control to increase the subwoofer
volume (page 29).
 Make sure that the on/standby
indicator on the subwoofer is lit in
green. If not, refer to “No sound is
heard from the subwoofer.” in
“Subwoofer wireless sound”
(page 26).
 A subwoofer is for reproducing bass
sound. In the case of input sources
that contain very little bass sound
components (i.e., a TV broadcast),
the sound from the subwoofer may
be difficult to hear.
 When you play content compatible
with copyright protection
technology (HDCP), it is not output
from the subwoofer.
BLUETOOTH device
radiation is nearby, move the device
away from this system.
No sound is output from the connected
BLUETOOTH device.
 Make sure that the BLUETOOTH
indicator (blue) is lit (page 29).
 Bring this system and the
BLUETOOTH device closer together.
 If a device that generates
electromagnetic radiation, such as a
wireless LAN equipment, other
BLUETOOTH devices, or a
microwave oven is nearby, move
the device away from this system.
 Remove any obstacle between this
system and the BLUETOOTH device
or move this system away from the
obstacle.
 Reposition the connected
BLUETOOTH device.
 Try changing the wireless frequency
of the Wi-Fi router, computer, etc.
to 5 GHz band.
 Increase the volume on the
connected BLUETOOTH device.
The sound is not in sync with the
image.
 When you are watching movies, you
may hear the sound with a slight
delay from the image.
Subwoofer wireless sound
No sound is heard from the subwoofer.
 Check that the AC power cord
(mains lead) of the subwoofer is
connected properly.
 The on/standby indicator does not
light.
– Check that the AC power cord
(mains lead) of the subwoofer is
connected properly.
– Press the / (on/standby)
button of the subwoofer to turn
on the power.
26GB
 The on/standby indicator flashes
slowly in green or lights in red.
– Move the subwoofer to a
location near the Bar Speaker so
that the on/standby indicator
lights in green.
– Follow the steps in “Linking the
system (Link to the subwoofer)”
(page 22).
– Check the communication status
of the wireless sound system
with [RF CHK] of the menu
(page 16).
 The on/standby indicator flashes
quickly in green.
– Consult your nearest Sony
dealer.
 The on/standby indicator flashes in
red.
– Press the / (on/standby)
button of the subwoofer to turn
off the power and check
whether the ventilation opening
of the subwoofer is blocked or
not.
 The subwoofer is designed for
playback of bass sound. When the
input source does not contain much
of bass sound, as is the case with
most TV programs, the bass sound
may not be audible.
 Press the SW  (subwoofer
volume) + button on the remote
control to increase the volume of
the subwoofer (page 32).
Sound skips or has noise.
 If there is a device nearby that
generates electromagnetic waves
like a wireless LAN or a microwave
oven in use, locate the system apart
from it.
 If there is an obstacle between the
Bar Speaker and the subwoofer,
move or remove it.
 Locate the Bar Speaker and the
subwoofer as close as possible.
 Switch the wireless LAN frequency
of any nearby Wi-Fi router or
personal computer to 5 GHz band.
 Switch the TV, Blu-ray Disc player,
etc. from wireless LAN to wired LAN.
Remote control
The TV remote control does not work.
 Install the Bar Speaker so that it
does not obstruct the remote
control sensor of the TV.
Others
The Control for HDMI function does not
work properly.
 Check the HDMI connection (refer to
the supplied Startup Guide).
 Set up the Control for HDMI function
on the TV. Refer to the operating
instructions supplied with the TV for
TV setting.
 If you connect/disconnect the AC
power cord (mains lead), wait more
than 15 seconds before operating
the system.
 Make sure that any device
connected is compatible with
“BRAVIA” Sync.
 Check the Control for HDMI settings
on the connected device. Refer to
No image is output from the TV when
the Bar Speaker is in standby mode.
 Make sure [S. THRU] is set to [ON]
(page 15).
If [PRTECT (protect)] appears on the
front panel display of the Bar Speaker
 Press the / (on/standby) button
on the Bar Speaker to turn off the
system. After the display stops
flashing, disconnect the AC power
cord (mains lead) then check that
nothing is blocking the ventilation
holes of the Bar Speaker.
The front panel display of the Bar
Speaker is not lit.
 Press DIMMER to set the brightness
to bright or dark, if set to off
(page 32).
27GB
Additional Information
The remote control does not function.
 Point the remote control at the
center of the front panel (remote
control sensor) of the system
(page 29).
 Remove any obstacles in the path
between the remote control and the
system.
 Replace both batteries in the
remote control with new ones, if
they are weak.
 Make sure you are pressing the
correct button on the remote
control.
the operating instructions supplied
with the connected device.
 If you connect the audio output of
video device with the system, using
a cable other than an HDMI cable,
no sound may be output because of
the Control for HDMI function. In
such a case, set [CTRL (Control for
HDMI)] in [HDMI] to [OFF] (page 15)
or connect the cable from the audio
output jack of the video device
directly to the TV.
 The type and number of devices
that can be controlled by the
“BRAVIA” Sync feature is restricted
by HDMI CEC standard as follows:
– Recording devices (Blu-ray Disc
recorder, DVD recorder, etc.): up
to 3
– Playback devices (Blu-ray Disc
Player, DVD player, etc.): up to 3
– Tuner-related devices: up to 4
– Audio system (receiver/
headphone): up to 1 (including
this system)
Sensors of the TV do not work properly.
 The Bar Speaker may block some
sensors (such as the brightness
sensor) and the remote control
receiver of your TV, or the “emitter
for 3D glasses (infrared
transmission)” of a 3D TV that
supports the infrared 3D glass
system or the wireless
communication. Move the Bar
Speaker away from the TV within a
range that allow those parts to
operate properly. For the locations
of the sensors and remote control
receiver, refer to the operating
instructions supplied with the TV.
Reset
If the system still does not operate
properly, reset the system as follows:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Press / (on/standby) to turn on
the system.
Press MENU.
Select [SYSTEM] with   (select),
then press ENTER.
Select [SYS.RST] with   (select),
then press ENTER.
When [START] appears on the
display of the Bar Speaker, press
ENTER.
[RESET] appears on the display, and
the settings of the menu and sound
fields, etc. return to their initial
status.
When [RESET] disappears,
disconnect the AC power cord
(mains lead).
Connect the AC power cord (mains
lead), then press / (on/standby)
to turn on the system.
28GB
8
Link the system to the subwoofer
(page 22).
Guide to parts and controls
For more information, refer to the pages indicated in parentheses.
Bar Speaker
Front and top panels
Remote control sensor
Front panel display
/ (on/standby) button
INPUT button (page 6, 19)
PAIRING button (page 6)
VOLUME +/– buttons
 N-Mark (page 7)
When using the NFC function, touch
your NFC-compatible device to the
mark.
 BLUETOOTH indicator (blue)
BLUETOOTH status
– During BLUETOOTH pairing:
Flashes quickly
– BLUETOOTH connection is being
attempted: Flashes
– BLUETOOTH connection has been
established: Lit
– BLUETOOTH standby mode (when
the system is off): Unlit
29GB
Additional Information






Rear panel
 AC power cord (mains lead)
 UPDATE port (HT-CT780 only)
For update only
 ANALOG IN jack
 DIGITAL IN (TV) jack
 HDMI IN 3 jack
30GB
 HDMI IN 1 jack
HT-CT780 is compatible with
HDCP 2.2.
 HDMI IN 2 jack
 HDMI OUT (ARC) jack
HT-CT780 is compatible with
HDCP 2.2.
Subwoofer
Additional Information
 On/standby indicator
 / (on/standby) button
 LINK button (page 22)
 AC power cord (mains lead)
31GB
Remote control









• When the display brightness is
set to “Off,” the display is turned
off after the display shows
operation status for several
seconds.
MENU/  (select)/ENTER/BACK
buttons (page 14)
Press  or  to select the menu
items. Then press ENTER to enter
the selection.
To return to the previous display,
press BACK.
 (volume) +*/– buttons
Adjusts the volume.
SW  (subwoofer volume) +/–
buttons
Adjusts the volume of bass
sound.
 (muting) button
Turns off the sound temporarily.
CLEARAUDIO+ button
Automatically selects the suitable
sound setting for the sound
source.
SOUND FIELD button (page 9)
Selects a sound mode.
VOICE button (page 9)
PAIRING button (page 6)
NIGHT button (page 9)
* The  + button has a tactile dot. Use it as
a guide during operation.
 INPUT button (page 6)
 / (on/standby) button
 DIMMER button
The display brightness can be
switched.
Bright  Dark  Off
32GB
Supported audio formats
Digital audio input formats
supported by the system
Audio formats supported by this system
are as follows.
• Dolby Digital
• Dolby Digital Plus*
• Dolby TrueHD*
• DTS
• DTS96/24
• DTS-HD Master Audio*
• DTS-HD High Resolution Audio*
• DTS-HD Low Bit Rate*
• Linear PCM 2ch 48 kHz or less
• Linear PCM Maximum 7.1ch 192 kHz or
less*
Additional Information
* It is possible to input these formats only
with HDMI connection.
33GB
Video formats supported by the system
Input/Output (HDMI Repeater block)
3D
File
2D
Frame
packing
Side-by-Side
(Half)
Over-Under
(Top-and-Bottom)
4096 × 2160p @ 59.94/60 Hz*




4096 × 2160p @ 50 Hz*




4096 × 2160p @ 23.98/24 Hz**




3840 × 2160p @ 59.94/60 Hz*




3840 × 2160p @ 50 Hz*




3840 × 2160p @ 29.97/30 Hz**




3840 × 2160p @ 25 Hz**




3840 × 2160p @ 23.98/24 Hz**




1920 × 1080p @ 59.94/60 Hz




1920 × 1080p @ 50 Hz




1920 × 1080p @ 29.97/30 Hz




1920 × 1080p @ 25 Hz




1920 × 1080p @ 23.98/24 Hz




1920 × 1080i @ 59.94/60 Hz




1920 × 1080i @ 50 Hz




1280 × 720p @ 59.94/60 Hz




1280 × 720p @ 50 Hz




1280 × 720p @ 29.97/30 Hz




1280 × 720p @ 23.98/24 Hz




720 × 480p @ 59.94/60 Hz




720 × 576p @ 50 Hz




640 × 480p @ 59.94/60 Hz




* YCbCr 4:2:0/Supported 8-bit only
** Supported 8-bit only
34GB
Specifications
Bar Speaker (SA-CT380,
SA-CT780)
Amplifier section
POWER OUTPUT (rated)
Front L/Front R:
50 W (per channel at 4 ohms, 1 kHz,
1% THD)
POWER OUTPUT (reference)
SA-CT380:
Front L/Front R: 100 W
(per channel at 4 ohms, 1 kHz)
SA-CT780:
Front L/Front R: 105 W
(per channel at 4 ohms, 1 kHz)
* HT-CT380: The 1, 2, and 3 jacks are
identical. Using any of them makes no
difference.
HT-CT780: The 1 jack supports HDCP 2.2
protocol. HDCP 2.2 is newly enhanced
copyright protection technology that is
used to protect content such as 4K
movies. The 2 and 3 jacks are identical.
Using any of them makes no difference.
** HT-CT780: The HDMI OUT jack supports
HDCP 2.2 protocol. HDCP 2.2 is newly
enhanced copyright protection
technology that is used to protect
content such as 4K movies.
HDMI Section
Connector
Type A (19pin)
BLUETOOTH section
Communication system
BLUETOOTH Specification version 3.0
Output
BLUETOOTH Specification Power Class
2
Maximum communication range
Line of sight approx. 10 m1)
1)
The actual range will vary depending on
factors such as obstacles between
devices, magnetic fields around a
microwave oven, static electricity,
cordless phone, reception sensitivity,
operating system, software application,
etc.
2)
BLUETOOTH standard profiles indicate
the purpose of BLUETOOTH
communication between devices.
3) Codec: Audio signal compression and
conversion format
4)
Subband Codec
5) Advanced Audio Coding
Front L/Front R speaker section
Speaker system
SA-CT380: Full range speaker system,
Acoustic suspension
SA-CT780: 2-way speaker system,
Acoustic suspension
Speaker
SA-CT380: 60 mm cone type
SA-CT780: Woofer: 60 mm cone type
Tweeter: 19 mm
soft dome type
General
Power requirements
110 V - 240 V AC, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption
SA-CT380:
On: 37 W
Standby: 0.3 W or less
(at the Power saving mode,
see page 19)
35GB
Additional Information
Inputs
HDMI IN* 1/2/3
ANALOG IN
DIGITAL IN (TV)
Outputs
HDMI OUT** (ARC)
Maximum number of devices to be
registered
9 devices
Frequency band
2.4 GHz band (2.4000 GHz 2.4835 GHz)
Modulation method
FHSS (Freq Hopping Spread Spectrum)
Compatible BLUETOOTH profiles2)
A2DP 1.2 (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile)
AVRCP 1.3 (Audio Video Remote
Control Profile)
Supported Codecs3)
SBC4), AAC5)
Transmission range (A2DP)
20 Hz - 20,000 Hz (Sampling frequency
44.1 kHz)
Standby: 0.5 W or less
(When [S. THRU] is [ON]: 6 W or less)
SA-CT780:
On: 40 W
Standby: 0.3 W or less
(at the Power saving mode,
see page 19)
Standby: 0.5 W or less
(When [S. THRU] is [ON]: 6 W or less)
Dimensions (approx.) (w/h/d)
SA-CT380:
900 mm × 51 mm × 117 mm (without
wall mounting brackets)
900 mm × 120 mm × 72 mm (with wall
mounting brackets)
SA-CT780:
1,030 mm × 55 mm × 117 mm (without
wall mounting brackets)
1,030 mm × 120 mm × 74 mm (with
wall mounting brackets)
Mass (approx.)
SA-CT380: 2.4 kg
SA-CT780: 2.8 kg
Subwoofer (SA-WCT380,
SA-WCT780)
POWER OUTPUT (reference)
SA-WCT380:
100 W (per channel at 4 ohms, 100 Hz)
SA-WCT780:
120 W (per channel at 4 ohms, 100 Hz)
Speaker system
Subwoofer system, Bass reflex
Speaker
SA-WCT380: 13 cm cone type
SA-WCT780: 16 cm cone type
Power requirements
110 V - 240 V AC, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption
SA-WCT380:
On: 20 W
Standby mode: 0.5 W or less
SA-WCT780:
On: 30 W
Standby mode: 0.5 W or less
Dimensions (approx.) (w/h/d)
SA-WCT380:
170 mm × 342 mm × 381 mm (vertical
installation)
342 mm × 172 mm × 381 mm
(horizontal installation)
36GB
SA-WCT780:
191 mm × 382 mm × 390 mm
Mass (approx.)
SA-WCT380: 6.6 kg
SA-WCT780: 7.9 kg
Wireless transmitter/
receiver section
Speaker system
Wireless Sound Specification version
2.0
Frequency band
2.4 GHz (2.4000 GHz - 2.4835 GHz)
Modulation method
Pi / 4 DQPSK
Design and specifications are subject to
change without notice.
On BLUETOOTH
communication
If you have any questions or problems
concerning your system, please consult
your nearest Sony dealer.
37GB
Additional Information
• BLUETOOTH devices should be used
within approximately 10 meters
(unobstructed distance) of each other.
The effective communication range
may become shorter under the
following conditions.
– When a person, metal object, wall or
other obstruction is between the
devices with a BLUETOOTH
connection
– Locations where a wireless LAN is
installed
– Around microwave ovens that are in
use
– Locations where other
electromagnetic waves occur
• BLUETOOTH devices and wireless LAN
(IEEE 802.11b/g) use the same
frequency band (2.4 GHz). When using
your BLUETOOTH device near a device
with wireless LAN capability,
electromagnetic interference may
occur. This could result in lower data
transfer rates, noise, or inability to
connect. If this happens, try the
following remedies:
– Use this system at least 10 meters
away from the wireless LAN device.
– Turn off the power to the wireless
LAN device when using your
BLUETOOTH device within 10 meters.
– Install this system and BLUETOOTH
device as closer to each other as
possible.
• The radio waves broadcast by this
system may interfere with the
operation of some medical devices.
Since this interference may result in
malfunction, always turn off the power
on this system and BLUETOOTH device
in the following locations:
– In hospitals, on trains, in airplanes, at
gas stations, and any place where
flammable gasses may be present
– Near automatic doors or fire alarms
• This system supports security
functions that comply with the
BLUETOOTH specification to ensure
secure connection during
communication using BLUETOOTH
technology. However, this security
may be insufficient depending on the
setting contents and other factors, so
always be careful when performing
communication using BLUETOOTH
technology.
• Sony cannot be held liable in any way
for damages or other loss resulting
from information leaks during
communication using BLUETOOTH
technology.
• BLUETOOTH communication is not
necessarily guaranteed with all
BLUETOOTH devices that have the
same profile as this system.
• BLUETOOTH devices connected with
this system must comply with the
BLUETOOTH specification prescribed
by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and must be
certified to comply. However, even
when a device complies with the
BLUETOOTH specification, there may
be cases where the characteristics or
specifications of the BLUETOOTH
device make it impossible to connect,
or may result in different control
methods, display or operation.
• Noise may occur or the audio may cut
off depending on the BLUETOOTH
device connected with this system,
the communications environment, or
surrounding conditions.
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
IMPORTANT:
BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE, PLEASE
READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
(“EULA”) CAREFULLY. BY USING THE
SOFTWARE YOU ARE ACCEPTING THE
TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT
ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA, YOU
MAY NOT USE THE SOFTWARE.
This EULA is a legal agreement between
you and Sony Corporation (“SONY”). This
EULA governs your rights and obligations
regarding the SONY software of SONY and/
or its third party licensors (including
SONY’s affiliates) and their respective
affiliates (collectively, the “THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS”), together with any updates/
upgrades provided by SONY, any printed,
on-line or other electronic documentation
for such software, and any data files
created by operation of such software
(collectively, the “SOFTWARE”).
Notwithstanding the foregoing, any
software in the SOFTWARE having a
separate end user license agreement
(including, but not limited to, GNU General
Public license and Lesser/Library General
Public License) shall be covered by such
applicable separate end user license
agreement in lieu of the terms of this EULA
to the extent required by such separate
end user license agreement (“EXCLUDED
SOFTWARE”).
SOFTWARE LICENSE
The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. The
SOFTWARE is protected by copyright and
other intellectual property laws and
international treaties.
COPYRIGHT
All right and title in and to the SOFTWARE
(including, but not limited to, any images,
photographs, animation, video, audio,
38GB
music, text and "applets" incorporated into
the SOFTWARE) is owned by SONY or one
or more of the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS.
GRANT OF LICENSE
SONY grants you a limited license to use
the SOFTWARE solely in connection with
your compatible device (“DEVICE”) and
only for your individual, non-commercial
use. SONY and the THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS expressly reserve all rights, title
and interest (including, but not limited to,
all intellectual property rights) in and to the
SOFTWARE that this EULA does not
specifically grant to you.
REQUIREMENTS AND
LIMITATIONS
You may not copy, publish, adapt,
redistribute, attempt to derive source
code, modify, reverse engineer,
decompile, or disassemble any of the
SOFTWARE, whether in whole or in part, or
create any derivative works from or of the
SOFTWARE unless such derivative works
are intentionally facilitated by the
SOFTWARE. You may not modify or tamper
with any digital rights management
functionality of the SOFTWARE. You may
not bypass, modify, defeat or circumvent
any of the functions or protections of the
SOFTWARE or any mechanisms operatively
linked to the SOFTWARE. You may not
separate any individual component of the
SOFTWARE for use on more than one
DEVICE unless expressly authorized to do
so by SONY. You may not remove, alter,
cover or deface any trademarks or notices
on the SOFTWARE. You may not share,
distribute, rent, lease, sublicense, assign,
transfer or sell the SOFTWARE. The
software, network services or other
products other than SOFTWARE upon
which the SOFTWARE’S performance
depends might be interrupted or
discontinued at the discretion of the
suppliers (software suppliers, service
suppliers, or SONY). SONY and such
suppliers do not warrant that the
SOFTWARE, network services, contents or
other products will continue to be
available, or will operate without
interruption or modification.
USE OF SOFTWARE WITH
COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS
CONTENT SERVICE
PLEASE ALSO NOTE THAT THE SOFTWARE
MAY BE DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH
CONTENT AVAILABLE THROUGH ONE OR
MORE CONTENT SERVICES (“CONTENT
SERVICE”). USE OF THE SERVICE AND THAT
CONTENT IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS OF
SERVICE OF THAT CONTENT SERVICE. IF
YOU DECLINE TO ACCEPT THOSE TERMS,
YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE
LIMITED. You acknowledge and agree that
certain content and services available
through the SOFTWARE may be provided
by third parties over which SONY has no
control. USE OF THE CONTENT SERVICE
REQUIRES AN INTERNET CONNECTION. THE
CONTENT SERVICE MAY BE DISCONTINUED
AT ANY TIME.
INTERNET CONNECTIVITY AND
THIRD PARTY SERVICES
You acknowledge and agree that access to
certain SOFTWARE features may require an
Internet connection for which you are
solely responsible. Further, you are solely
EXPORT AND OTHER
REGULATIONS
You agree to comply with all applicable
export and re-export restrictions and
regulations of the area or country in which
you reside, and not to transfer, or authorize
the transfer, of the SOFTWARE to a
prohibited country or otherwise in violation
of any such restrictions or regulations.
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES
The SOFTWARE is not fault-tolerant and is
not designed, manufactured or intended
for use or resale as on-line control
equipment in hazardous environments
requiring fail-safe performance, such as in
the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft
navigation or communication systems, air
traffic control, direct life support machines,
or weapons systems, in which the failure of
the SOFTWARE could lead to death,
personal injury, or severe physical or
environmental damage ("HIGH RISK
ACTIVITIES"). SONY, each of the THIRDPARTY SUPPLIERS, and each of their
respective affiliates specifically disclaim
any express or implied warranty, duty or
condition of fitness for HIGH RISK
ACTIVITIES.
EXCLUSION OF WARRANTY ON
SOFTWARE
You acknowledge and agree that use of
the SOFTWARE is at your sole risk and that
you are responsible for use of the
SOFTWARE. The SOFTWARE is provided "AS
39GB
Additional Information
The SOFTWARE may be capable of being
used by you to view, store, process and/or
use content created by you and/or third
parties. Such content may be protected by
copyright, other intellectual property laws,
and/or agreements. You agree to use the
SOFTWARE only in compliance with all such
laws and agreements that apply to such
content. You acknowledge and agree that
SONY may take appropriate measures to
protect the copyright of content stored,
processed or used by the SOFTWARE. Such
measures include, but are not limited to,
counting the frequency of your backup and
restoration through certain SOFTWARE
features, refusal to accept your request to
enable restoration of data, and termination
of this EULA in the event of your
illegitimate use of the SOFTWARE.
responsible for payment of any third party
fees associated with your Internet
connection, including but not limited to
Internet service provider or airtime
charges. Operation of the SOFTWARE may
be limited or restricted depending on the
capabilities, bandwidth or technical
limitations of your Internet connection and
service. The provision, quality and security
of such Internet connectivity are the sole
responsibility of the third party providing
such service.
IS,” without warranty, duty or condition of
any kind.
SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS (for purposes of this Section,
SONY and each of the THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to
as “SONY”) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES, DUTIES OR CONDITIONS,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
SONY DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY
CONDITIONS OR REPRESENTATIONS (A)
THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN ANY
OF THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THEY WILL BE
UPDATED, (B) THAT THE OPERATION OF
ANY OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECT
OR ERROR-FREE OR THAT ANY DEFECTS
WILL BE CORRECTED, (C) THAT THE
SOFTWARE WILL NOT DAMAGE ANY OTHER
SOFTWARE, HARDWARE OR DATA, (D)
THAT ANY SOFTWARE, NETWORK SERVICES
(INCLUDING THE INTERNET) OR PRODUCTS
(OTHER THAN THE SOFTWARE) UPON
WHICH THE SOFTWARE’S PERFORMANCE
DEPENDS WILL CONTINUE TO BE
AVAILABLE, UNINTERRUPTED OR
UNMODIFIED, AND (E) REGARDING THE USE
OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE
SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS
CORRECTNESS, ACCURACY, RELIABILITY,
OR OTHERWISE.
NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR
ADVICE GIVEN BY SONY OR AN
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF SONY
SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, DUTY OR
CONDITION OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE
SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU
ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR
CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, SO THESE EXCLUSIONS MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU.
40GB
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS (for purposes of this Section,
SONY and each of the THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to
as “SONY”) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, BREACH OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY
OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY
RELATED TO THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS
OF REVENUE, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF USE
OF THE SOFTWARE OR ANY ASSOCIATED
HARDWARE, DOWN TIME AND USER’S
TIME, EVEN IF ANY OF THEM HAVE BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. IN ANY CASE, EACH AND ALL OF
THEIR AGGREGATE LIABILITY UNDER ANY
PROVISION OF THIS EULA SHALL BE
LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID
FOR THE PRODUCT. SOME JURISDICTIONS
DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU.
AUTOMATIC UPDATE FEATURE
From time to time, SONY or the THIRDPARTY SUPPLIERS may automatically
update or otherwise modify the
SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to,
for purposes of enhancement of security
functions, error correction and
improvement of functions, at such time as
you interact with SONY's or third parties'
servers, or otherwise. Such updates or
modifications may delete or change the
nature of features or other aspects of the
SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to,
functions you may rely upon. You
acknowledge and agree that such activities
may occur at SONY's sole discretion and
that SONY may condition continued use of
the SOFTWARE upon your complete
installation or acceptance of such update
or modifications. Any updates/
modifications shall be deemed to be, and
shall constitute part of, the SOFTWARE for
purposes of this EULA. By acceptance of
this EULA, you consent to such update/
modification.
ENTIRE AGREEMENT, WAIVER,
SEVERABILITY
This EULA and SONY’s privacy policy, each
as amended and modified from time to
time, together constitute the entire
agreement between you and SONY with
respect to the SOFTWARE. The failure of
SONY to exercise or enforce any right or
provision of this EULA shall not constitute a
waiver of such right or provision. If any part
of this EULA is held invalid, illegal, or
unenforceable, that provision shall be
enforced to the maximum extent
permissible so as to maintain the intent of
this EULA, and the other parts will remain in
full force and effect.
The United Nations Convention on
Contracts for the International Sale of
Goods shall not apply to this EULA. This
EULA shall be governed by the laws of
Japan, without regards to conflict of laws
provisions. Any dispute arising out of this
EULA shall be subject to the exclusive
venue of the Tokyo District Court in Japan,
and the parties hereby consent to the
venue and jurisdiction of such courts.
EQUITABLE REMEDIES
Notwithstanding anything contained in
this EULA to the contrary, you
acknowledge and agree that any violation
of or non-compliance with this EULA by
you will cause irreparable harm to SONY,
for which monetary damages would be
inadequate, and you consent to SONY
obtaining any injunctive or equitable relief
that SONY deems necessary or appropriate
in such circumstances. SONY may also take
any legal and technical remedies to
prevent violation of and/or to enforce this
EULA, including, but not limited to,
immediate termination of your use of the
TERMINATION
Without prejudice to any of its other rights,
SONY may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with any of its terms. In case of
such termination, you must cease all use,
and destroy any copies, of the SOFTWARE.
AMENDMENT
SONY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO AMEND
ANY OF THE TERMS OF THIS EULA AT ITS
SOLE DISCRETION BY POSTING NOTICE ON
A SONY DESIGNATED WEB SITE, BY EMAIL
NOTIFICATION TO AN EMAIL ADDRESS
PROVIDED BY YOU, BY PROVIDING NOTICE
AS PART OF THE PROCESS IN WHICH YOU
OBTAIN UPGRADES/UPDATES OR BY ANY
OTHER LEGALLY RECOGNIZABLE FORM OF
NOTICE. If you do not agree to the
amendment, you should promptly contact
SONY for instructions. Your continued use
of the SOFTWARE after the effective date of
any such notice shall be deemed your
agreement to be bound by such
amendment.
THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARIES
Each THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER is an express
intended third-party beneficiary of, and
shall have the right to enforce, each
provision of this EULA with respect to the
SOFTWARE of such party.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, you may contact SONY by
writing to SONY at applicable contact
address of each area or country.
Copyright © 2014 Sony Corporation.
41GB
Additional Information
GOVERNING LAW AND
JURISDICTION
SOFTWARE, if SONY believes in its sole
discretion that you are violating or intend
to violate this EULA. These remedies are in
addition to any other remedies SONY may
have at law, in equity or under contract.
42GB
Additional Information
43GB
TERMINATION
Without prejudice to any of its other rights,
SONY may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with any of its terms. In case of
such termination, you must cease all use,
and destroy any copies, of the SOFTWARE.
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
AMENDMENT
SONY RESERVES THE RIGHT TO AMEND
ANY OF THE TERMS OF THIS EULA AT ITS
SOLE DISCRETION BY POSTING NOTICE ON
A SONY DESIGNATED WEB SITE, BY EMAIL
NOTIFICATION TO AN EMAIL ADDRESS
PROVIDED BY YOU, BY PROVIDING NOTICE
AS PART OF THE PROCESS IN WHICH YOU
OBTAIN UPGRADES/UPDATES OR BY ANY
OTHER LEGALLY RECOGNIZABLE FORM OF
NOTICE. If you do not agree to the
amendment, you should promptly contact
SONY for instructions. Your continued use
of the SOFTWARE after the effective date of
any such notice shall be deemed your
agreement to be bound by such
amendment.
THIRD-PARTY BENEFICIARIES
Each THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIER is an express
intended third-party beneficiary of, and
shall have the right to enforce, each
provision of this EULA with respect to the
SOFTWARE of such party.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, you may contact SONY by
writing to SONY at applicable contact
address of each area or country.
Copyright © 2014 Sony Corporation.
41AR
ENTIRE AGREEMENT, WAIVER,
SEVERABILITY
This EULA and SONY’s privacy policy, each
as amended and modified from time to
time, together constitute the entire
agreement between you and SONY with
respect to the SOFTWARE. The failure of
SONY to exercise or enforce any right or
provision of this EULA shall not constitute a
waiver of such right or provision. If any part
of this EULA is held invalid, illegal, or
unenforceable, that provision shall be
enforced to the maximum extent
permissible so as to maintain the intent of
this EULA, and the other parts will remain
in full force and effect.
GOVERNING LAW AND
JURISDICTION
The United Nations Convention on
Contracts for the International Sale of
Goods shall not apply to this EULA. This
EULA shall be governed by the laws of
Japan, without regards to conflict of laws
provisions. Any dispute arising out of this
EULA shall be subject to the exclusive
venue of the Tokyo District Court in Japan,
and the parties hereby consent to the
venue and jurisdiction of such courts.
EQUITABLE REMEDIES
Notwithstanding anything contained in
this EULA to the contrary, you acknowledge
and agree that any violation of or
non-compliance with this EULA by you will
cause irreparable harm to SONY, for which
monetary damages would be inadequate,
and you consent to SONY obtaining any
injunctive or equitable relief that SONY
deems necessary or appropriate in such
circumstances. SONY may also take any
legal and technical remedies to prevent
violation of and/or to enforce this EULA,
including, but not limited to, immediate
termination of your use of the SOFTWARE,
if SONY believes in its sole discretion that
you are violating or intend to violate this
EULA. These remedies are in addition to
any other remedies SONY may have at law,
in equity or under contract.
OR IMPLIED WARRANTY, BREACH OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY
OR UNDER ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY
RELATED TO THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF
REVENUE, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF USE OF
THE SOFTWARE OR ANY ASSOCIATED
HARDWARE, DOWN TIME AND USER’S
TIME, EVEN IF ANY OF THEM HAVE BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. IN ANY CASE, EACH AND ALL OF
THEIR AGGREGATE LIABILITY UNDER ANY
PROVISION OF THIS EULA SHALL BE
LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID
FOR THE PRODUCT. SOME JURISDICTIONS
DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU.
AUTOMATIC UPDATE FEATURE
From time to time, SONY or the THIRDPARTY SUPPLIERS may automatically
update or otherwise modify the
SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to,
for purposes of enhancement of security
functions, error correction and
improvement of functions, at such time as
you interact with SONY's or third parties'
servers, or otherwise. Such updates or
modifications may delete or change the
nature of features or other aspects of the
SOFTWARE, including, but not limited to,
functions you may rely upon. You
acknowledge and agree that such activities
may occur at SONY's sole discretion and
that SONY may condition continued use of
the SOFTWARE upon your complete
installation or acceptance of such update
or modifications. Any updates/
modifications shall be deemed to be, and
shall constitute part of, the SOFTWARE for
purposes of this EULA. By acceptance of
this EULA, you consent to such update/
modification.
SONY and each of the THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to
as “SONY”) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES, DUTIES OR CONDITIONS,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
SONY DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY
CONDITIONS OR REPRESENTATIONS (A)
THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN ANY
OF THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THEY WILL BE
UPDATED, (B) THAT THE OPERATION OF
ANY OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE CORRECT
OR ERROR-FREE OR THAT ANY DEFECTS
WILL BE CORRECTED, (C) THAT THE
SOFTWARE WILL NOT DAMAGE ANY OTHER
SOFTWARE, HARDWARE OR DATA, (D) THAT
ANY SOFTWARE, NETWORK SERVICES
(INCLUDING THE INTERNET) OR PRODUCTS
(OTHER THAN THE SOFTWARE) UPON
WHICH THE SOFTWARE’S PERFORMANCE
DEPENDS WILL CONTINUE TO BE
AVAILABLE, UNINTERRUPTED OR
UNMODIFIED, AND (E) REGARDING THE USE
OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF THE
SOFTWARE IN TERMS OF ITS CORRECTNESS,
ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE.
NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR
ADVICE GIVEN BY SONY OR AN
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OF SONY
SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, DUTY OR
CONDITION OR IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE
SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU
ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR
CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, SO THESE EXCLUSIONS MAY
NOT APPLY TO YOU.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS (for purposes of this Section,
SONY and each of the THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS shall be collectively referred to
as “SONY”) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS
40AR
Internet service provider or airtime
charges. Operation of the SOFTWARE may
be limited or restricted depending on the
capabilities, bandwidth or technical
limitations of your Internet connection and
service. The provision, quality and security
of such Internet connectivity are the sole
responsibility of the third party providing
such service.
EXPORT AND OTHER
REGULATIONS
You agree to comply with all applicable
export and re-export restrictions and
regulations of the area or country in which
you reside, and not to transfer, or authorize
the transfer, of the SOFTWARE to a
prohibited country or otherwise in violation
of any such restrictions or regulations.
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES
The SOFTWARE is not fault-tolerant and is
not designed, manufactured or intended
for use or resale as on-line control
equipment in hazardous environments
requiring fail-safe performance, such as in
the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft
navigation or communication systems, air
traffic control, direct life support machines,
or weapons systems, in which the failure of
the SOFTWARE could lead to death,
personal injury, or severe physical or
environmental damage ("HIGH RISK
ACTIVITIES"). SONY, each of the THIRDPARTY SUPPLIERS, and each of their
respective affiliates specifically disclaim
any express or implied warranty, duty or
condition of fitness for HIGH RISK
ACTIVITIES.
EXCLUSION OF WARRANTY ON
SOFTWARE
You acknowledge and agree that use of
the SOFTWARE is at your sole risk and that
you are responsible for use of the
SOFTWARE. The SOFTWARE is provided "AS
IS,” without warranty, duty or condition of
any kind.
SONY AND EACH OF THE THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS (for purposes of this Section,
39AR
USE OF SOFTWARE WITH
COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS
The SOFTWARE may be capable of being
used by you to view, store, process and/or
use content created by you and/or third
parties. Such content may be protected by
copyright, other intellectual property laws,
and/or agreements. You agree to use the
SOFTWARE only in compliance with all such
laws and agreements that apply to such
content. You acknowledge and agree that
SONY may take appropriate measures to
protect the copyright of content stored,
processed or used by the SOFTWARE. Such
measures include, but are not limited to,
counting the frequency of your backup and
restoration through certain SOFTWARE
features, refusal to accept your request to
enable restoration of data, and termination
of this EULA in the event of your
illegitimate use of the SOFTWARE.
CONTENT SERVICE
PLEASE ALSO NOTE THAT THE SOFTWARE
MAY BE DESIGNED TO BE USED WITH
CONTENT AVAILABLE THROUGH ONE OR
MORE CONTENT SERVICES (“CONTENT
SERVICE”). USE OF THE SERVICE AND THAT
CONTENT IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS OF
SERVICE OF THAT CONTENT SERVICE. IF
YOU DECLINE TO ACCEPT THOSE TERMS,
YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE
LIMITED. You acknowledge and agree that
certain content and services available
through the SOFTWARE may be provided
by third parties over which SONY has no
control. USE OF THE CONTENT SERVICE
REQUIRES AN INTERNET CONNECTION. THE
CONTENT SERVICE MAY BE DISCONTINUED
AT ANY TIME.
INTERNET CONNECTIVITY AND
THIRD PARTY SERVICES
You acknowledge and agree that access to
certain SOFTWARE features may require an
Internet connection for which you are
solely responsible. Further, you are solely
responsible for payment of any third party
fees associated with your Internet
connection, including but not limited to
the SOFTWARE) is owned by SONY or one
or more of the THIRD-PARTY SUPPLIERS.
GRANT OF LICENSE
SONY grants you a limited license to use
the SOFTWARE solely in connection with
your compatible device (“DEVICE”) and
only for your individual, non-commercial
use. SONY and the THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS expressly reserve all rights, title
and interest (including, but not limited to,
all intellectual property rights) in and to the
SOFTWARE that this EULA does not
specifically grant to you.
REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
You may not copy, publish, adapt,
redistribute, attempt to derive source code,
modify, reverse engineer, decompile, or
disassemble any of the SOFTWARE,
whether in whole or in part, or create any
derivative works from or of the SOFTWARE
unless such derivative works are
intentionally facilitated by the SOFTWARE.
You may not modify or tamper with any
digital rights management functionality of
the SOFTWARE. You may not bypass,
modify, defeat or circumvent any of the
functions or protections of the SOFTWARE
or any mechanisms operatively linked to
the SOFTWARE. You may not separate any
individual component of the SOFTWARE
for use on more than one DEVICE unless
expressly authorized to do so by SONY. You
may not remove, alter, cover or deface any
trademarks or notices on the SOFTWARE.
You may not share, distribute, rent, lease,
sublicense, assign, transfer or sell the
SOFTWARE. The software, network services
or other products other than SOFTWARE
upon which the SOFTWARE’S performance
depends might be interrupted or
discontinued at the discretion of the
suppliers (software suppliers, service
suppliers, or SONY). SONY and such
suppliers do not warrant that the
SOFTWARE, network services, contents or
other products will continue to be
available, or will operate without
interruption or modification.
END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT
IMPORTANT:
BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE, PLEASE
READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
(“EULA”) CAREFULLY. BY USING THE
SOFTWARE YOU ARE ACCEPTING THE
TERMS OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT
ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS EULA, YOU
MAY NOT USE THE SOFTWARE.
This EULA is a legal agreement between
you and Sony Corporation (“SONY”). This
EULA governs your rights and obligations
regarding the SONY software of SONY and/
or its third party licensors (including
SONY’s affiliates) and their respective
affiliates (collectively, the “THIRD-PARTY
SUPPLIERS”), together with any updates/
upgrades provided by SONY, any printed,
on-line or other electronic documentation
for such software, and any data files
created by operation of such software
(collectively, the “SOFTWARE”).
Notwithstanding the foregoing, any
software in the SOFTWARE having a
separate end user license agreement
(including, but not limited to, GNU General
Public license and Lesser/Library General
Public License) shall be covered by such
applicable separate end user license
agreement in lieu of the terms of this EULA
to the extent required by such separate
end user license agreement (“EXCLUDED
SOFTWARE”).
SOFTWARE LICENSE
The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. The
SOFTWARE is protected by copyright and
other intellectual property laws and
international treaties.
COPYRIGHT
All right and title in and to the SOFTWARE
(including, but not limited to, any images,
photographs, animation, video, audio,
music, text and "applets" incorporated into
38AR
‫ﺣﻮل اﺗﺼﺎل ‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫اذا ﻛﺎن ﻟﺪﻳﻚ اي ﺳﺆال او ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻣﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺸﺎرة وﻛﻴﻞ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ Sony‬اﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪37AR‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﰲ ﻧﻄﺎق‬
‫‪ 10‬أﻣﺘﺎر ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ )ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺪون ﻋﻮاﺋﻖ( ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ميﻜﻦ أن‬
‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺪى اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻟﻔ ّﻌﺎل أﻗﴫ ﰲ اﻟﺤﺎﻻت اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻋﻨﺪ وﺟﻮد ﺷﺨﺺ أو ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﻌﺪين أو ﺣﺎﺋﻂ أو ﻋﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫آﺧﺮ ﺑني اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﳌﺰودة ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎل ‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫– أﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠيك‬
‫– ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ أﻓﺮان اﳌﺎﻳﻜﺮوﻳﻒ ﻗﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫– أﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺗﺤﺪث ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺎت ﻛﻬﺮوﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ أﺧﺮى‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ BLUETOOTH‬وﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪LAN‬‬
‫اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )‪ (IEEE 802.11b/g‬ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ اﻟﱰدد‬
‫)‪ 2.4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز ‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻟﻪ ﻗﺪرة ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪث ﺗﺪاﺧﻞ اﻟﻜﱰوﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﴘ‪ .‬وﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي ذﻟﻚ إﱃ‬
‫اﻧﺨﻔﺎض ﻣﻌﺪﻻت ﻧﻘﻞ اﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎت أو ﺣﺪوث ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ أو‬
‫ﺗﻌﺬر اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‪ .‬إذا ﺣﺪث ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺠ ّﺮب اﻟﺤﻠﻮل اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫– اﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ اﻻﻗﻞ ‪ 10‬اﻣﺘﺎر ﺑﻌﻴﺪا ً ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ LAN‬اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك‪.‬‬
‫– اﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ LAN‬اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﻋﲆ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 10‬أﻣﺘﺎر‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم وﺟﻬﺎز ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫أﻗﺮب ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺪاﺧﻞ ﺑﺚ ﻣﻮﺟﺎت اﻟﺮادﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬وﻧﻈ ًﺮا ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺣﺪوث‬
‫ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺘﺪاﺧﻞ‪ ،‬اﺣﺮص دامئﺎً ﻋﲆ ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم وﺟﻬﺎز ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﰲ اﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫– ﰲ اﳌﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎت واﻟﻘﻄﺎرات واﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮات وﻣﺤﻄﺎت‬
‫اﻟﻮﻗﻮد وأي ﻣﻜﺎن ميﻜﻦ أن ﻳﺘﻮاﺟﺪ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻏﺎزات ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎل‬
‫– ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ اﻷﺑﻮاب اﻵﻟﻴﺔ أو أﺟﺮاس إﻧﺬار اﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫• ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم وﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻷﻣﺎن اﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﻟﻀامن اﻻﺗﺼﺎل اﻵﻣﻦ أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ .BLUETOOTH‬وﻣﻊ ذﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻷﻣﺎن ﻫﺬا ﻏري ٍ‬
‫ﻛﺎف وﻓﻘًﺎ ﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫اﻹﻋﺪاد وﻋﻮاﻣﻞ أﺧﺮى‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺧﻲ اﻟﺤﺬر دامئًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪.BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫• ﻻ ميﻜﻦ أن ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ ،Sony‬ﺑﺄي ﺣﺎل ﻣﻦ اﻷﺣﻮال‪،‬‬
‫ﴪب‬
‫ﻣﺴﺆوﻟﻴﺔ اﻷﴐار أو اﻟﺨﺴﺎﺋﺮ اﻷﺧﺮى اﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗ ّ‬
‫اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت أﺛﻨﺎء اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻳﻀﻤﻦ اﺗﺼﺎل ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﺑﺎﻟﴬورة ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ BLUETOOTH‬اﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﻠﻒ اﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﺗﺘﻮاﻓﻖ أﺟﻬﺰة ‪ BLUETOOTH‬اﳌﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺬا‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ‪ BLUETOOTH‬اﳌﺤﺪدة ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ ،Bluetooth SIG, Inc.‬ﻛام ﻳﺠﺐ اﻋﺘامد‬
‫ﺗﻮاﻓﻘﻬﺎ‪ .‬وﻣﻊ ذﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺎﻻت ﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ أو ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﺗﺆدي إﱃ ﺗﻌﺬر اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ أو‬
‫وﺟﻮد ﻃﺮق ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ أو اﻟﻌﺮض أو اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫وإن ﻛﺎن اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ‪.BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪث اﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ أو ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت وﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫‪ BLUETOOTH‬اﳌﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻬﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬أو ﺑﻴﺌﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻت‪،‬‬
‫أو اﻟﻈﺮوف اﳌﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ اﻷﻳﴪ‪/‬اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ اﻷميﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم ﺳامﻋﺎت‬
‫‪ :SA-CT380‬ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﻜﱪ ﺻﻮت ﻛﺎﻣﻞ اﻟﻨﻄﺎق‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺻﻮيت‬
‫‪ :SA-CT780‬ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﻜﱪ ﺻﻮت ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻫني‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺻﻮيت‬
‫اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ 60 :SA-CT380‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮع ﻣﺨﺮوﻃﻲ‬
‫‪ :SA-CT780‬ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ 60 :‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮع ﻣﺨﺮوﻃﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻬﺎر ﻋﺎﱄ اﻟﱰدد‪ 19 :‬ﻣﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮع ﻗﺒﺔ ﻟﻴﻨﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎم‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎت اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ 110‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ 240 -‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎر ﻣﱰدد‪ 50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪/‬‬
‫‪ 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻬﻼك اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪:SA-CT380‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 37 :‬واط‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪ 0.3 :‬واط أو أﻗﻞ‬
‫)ﰲ وﺿﻊ ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(19‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪ 0.5 :‬واط أو أﻗﻞ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [S. THRU‬ﻋﲆ ]‪ 6 :[ON‬واط أو‬
‫أﻗﻞ(‬
‫‪:SA-CT780‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 40 :‬واط‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪ 0.3 :‬واط أو أﻗﻞ )ﰲ وﺿﻊ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬اﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(19‬‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪ 0.5 :‬واط أو أﻗﻞ‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [S. THRU‬ﻋﲆ ]‪ 6 :[ON‬واط أو‬
‫أﻗﻞ(‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً( )ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪:SA-CT380‬‬
‫‪ 900‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 51‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 117‬ﻣﻢ )ﺑﺪون ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻚ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار(‬
‫‪ 900‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 120‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 72‬ﻣﻢ )مبﺸﺎﺑﻚ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺠﺪار(‬
‫‪:SA-CT780‬‬
‫‪ 1,030‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 55‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 117‬ﻣﻢ )ﺑﺪون ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻚ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار(‬
‫‪ 1,030‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 120‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 74‬ﻣﻢ )مبﺸﺎﺑﻚ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺠﺪار(‬
‫اﻟﻮزن )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً(‬
‫‪ 2.4 :SA-CT380‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ 2.8 :SA-CT780‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪36AR‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ )‪،SA-WCT380‬‬
‫‪(SA-WCT780‬‬
‫ﺧﺮج اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﻣﺮﺟﻊ(‬
‫‪:SA-WCT380‬‬
‫‪ 100‬واط )ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ ‪ 4‬أوم‪ 100 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪:SA-WCT780‬‬
‫‪ 120‬واط )ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ ‪ 4‬أوم‪ 100 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم ﺳامﻋﺎت‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬اﻧﻌﻜﺎس ﺻﻮت ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺴامﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ 13 :SA-WCT380‬ﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮع ﻣﺨﺮوﻃﻲ‬
‫‪ 16 :SA-WCT780‬ﺳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮع ﻣﺨﺮوﻃﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎت اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪ 110‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ‪ 240 -‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎر ﻣﱰدد‪ 50 ،‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪/‬‬
‫‪ 60‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫اﺳﺘﻬﻼك اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪:SA-WCT380‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 20 :‬واط‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪ 0.5 :‬واط أو أﻗﻞ‬
‫‪:SA-WCT780‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 30 :‬واط‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪ 0.5 :‬واط أو أﻗﻞ‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً( )ﻋﺮض‪/‬ارﺗﻔﺎع‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫‪:SA-WCT380‬‬
‫‪ 170‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 342‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 381‬ﻣﻢ )ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﻤﻮدي(‬
‫‪ 342‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 172‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 381‬ﻣﻢ )ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ أﻓﻘﻲ(‬
‫‪:SA-WCT780‬‬
‫‪ 191‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 382‬ﻣﻢ × ‪ 390‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫اﻟﻮزن )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً(‬
‫‪ 6.6 :SA-WCT380‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫‪ 7.9 :SA-WCT780‬ﻛﺠﻢ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻹرﺳﺎل‪/‬ﺟﻬﺎز اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم ﺳامﻋﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك اﻹﺻﺪار ‪2.0‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺔ اﻟﱰدد‬
‫‪ 2.4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ 2.4000‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪2.4835 -‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻀﻤني‬
‫‪Pi / 4 DQPSK‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ واﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴري دون إﺷﻌﺎر‪.‬‬
‫اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت )‪،SA-CT380‬‬
‫‪(SA-CT780‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫‪ANALOG IN‬‬
‫‪(TV) DIGITAL IN‬‬
‫اﳌﺨﺮﺟﺎت‬
‫‪(ARC) **HDMI OUT‬‬
‫* ‪ :HT-CT380‬اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ 1‬و‪ 2‬و‪ 3‬ﻣﺘامﺛﻠﺔ‪ .‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أي ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ميﺜﻞ أي ﻓﺮق‪.‬‬
‫‪ :HT-CT780‬اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ 1‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ اﻟﱪوﺗﻮﻛﻮل ‪HDCP 2.2.‬‬
‫‪ HDCP 2.2‬ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة ﻟﺤامﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮق‬
‫اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺤامﻳﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮى ﻣﺜﻞ أﻓﻼم ‪ .4K‬اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫‪ 2‬و ‪ 3‬ﻣﺘامﺛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام أي ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻻ ميﺜﻞ أي ﻓﺮق‪.‬‬
‫** ‪ :HT-CT780‬اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ اﻟﱪوﺗﻮﻛﻮل‬
‫‪ HDCP 2.2 .HDCP 2.2‬ﻫﻲ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪة‬
‫ﻟﺤامﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺤامﻳﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮى ﻣﺜﻞ أﻓﻼم‬
‫‪.4K‬‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫اﳌﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻮع ‪ 19) A‬ﺳ ًﻨﺎ(‬
‫ﻗﺴﻢ ‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬
‫اﻟﺨﺮج‬
‫ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ‪ BLUETOOTH‬اﻹﺻﺪار ‪3.0‬‬
‫ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺻﻨﻒ ‪2‬‬
‫‪35AR‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺮج اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﻣﻌﺪّل(‬
‫أﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻳﺴﺎر‪/‬أﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ميني‪:‬‬
‫‪ 50‬واط )ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ ‪ 4‬أوم‪ 1 ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪%1 ،‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﺸﻮه اﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻘﻲ اﻟﻜﲇ(‬
‫ﺧﺮج اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﻣﺮﺟﻊ(‬
‫‪:SA-CT380‬‬
‫أﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻳﺴﺎر‪/‬أﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ميني‪ 100 :‬واط )ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ 4‬أوم‪ 1 ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪:SA-CT780‬‬
‫أﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻳﺴﺎر‪/‬أﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ميني‪ 105 :‬واط )ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻮاﺣﺪة ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪ 4‬أوم‪ 1 ،‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫اﻹدﺧﺎﻻت‬
‫‪*HDMI IN 1/2/3‬‬
‫اﻟﺤﺪ اﻻﻗﴡ ﳌﺪى اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬
‫ﺧﻂ اﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ 10‬ﻣﱰ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺪد اﻷﻗﴡ ﻟﻸﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻲ ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ 9‬أﺟﻬﺰة‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺔ اﻟﱰدد‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪ 2.4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ 2.4000‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫ ‪ 2.4835‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ اﻟﺘﻀﻤني‬
‫‪(Freq Hopping Spread Spectrum) FHSS‬‬
‫‪(2‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫‪A2DP 1.2‬‬
‫)‪(Advanced Audio Distribution Profile‬‬
‫‪AVRCP 1.3‬‬
‫)‪(Audio Video Remote Control Profile‬‬
‫‪(3‬‬
‫ﺑﺮاﻣﺞ اﻟﱰﻣﻴﺰ اﳌﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫‪(5‬‬
‫‪AAC ،(4 SBC‬‬
‫ﻣﺪى اﻻرﺳﺎل )‪(A2DP‬‬
‫‪ 20‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ – ‪ 20,000‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )ﺗﺮدد اﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ‪ 44.1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ‬
‫ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪ (1‬ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ اﳌﺪى اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ وﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﻌﻮاﻣﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ اﻟﻌﻮاﺋﻖ ﺑني‬
‫اﻷﺟﻬﺰة واﳌﺠﺎﻻت اﳌﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺣﻮل ﻓﺮن ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮووﻳﻒ‬
‫واﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء اﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ واﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك وﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‬
‫وﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬وﻣﺎ إﱃ ذﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (2‬ﺗﺸري ﻣﻠﻔﺎت ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ‪ BLUETOOTH‬اﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ إﱃ اﻟﻐﺮض‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﺗﺼﺎل ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﺑني اﻻﺟﻬﺰة‪.‬‬
‫‪ (3‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﱰﻣﻴﺰ‪ :‬ﺿﻐﻂ اﺷﺎرة اﻟﺼﻮت و ﺻﻴﻐﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫‪ (4‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺮﻣﻴﺰ اﻟﻨﻄﺎق اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫‪ (5‬اﻟﱰﻣﻴﺰ اﳌﺘﻘﺪم ﻟﻠﺼﻮت‬
‫‪(1‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻎ اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ اﳌﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫إﺧﺮاج‪/‬إدﺧﺎل )ﻛﺘﻠﺔ ﻣﻜﺮر ‪(HDMI‬‬
‫‪3D‬‬
‫اﳌﻠﻒ‬
‫‪2D‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ اﻷﻃﺮ‬
‫‪ 60/59.94 @ 4096 × 2160p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ*‬
‫‪ 50 @ 4096 × 2160p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ*‬
‫‪ 24/23.98 @ 4096 × 2160p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ**‬
‫‪ 60/59.94 @ 3840 × 2160p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ*‬
‫‪ 50 @ 3840 × 2160p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ*‬
‫‪ 30/29.97 @ 3840 × 2160p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ**‬
‫‪ 25 @ 3840 × 2160p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ**‬
‫‪ 24/23.98 @ 3840 × 2160p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ**‬
‫‪ 60/59.94 @ 1920 × 1080p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 50 @ 1920 × 1080p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 30/29.97 @ 1920 × 1080p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 25 @ 1920 × 1080p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 24/23.98 @ 1920 × 1080p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 60/59.94 @ 1920 × 1080i‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 50 @ 1920 × 1080i‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 60/59.94 @ 1280 × 720p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 50 @ 1280 × 720p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 30/29.97 @ 1280 × 720p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 24/23.98 @ 1280 × 720p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 60/59.94 @ 720 × 480p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 50 @ 720 × 576p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 60/59.94 @ 640 × 480p‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫* ‪/YCbCr 4:2:0‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ 8‬ﺑﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫** ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ 8‬ﺑﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪34AR‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ إﱃ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻓﻮق‪-‬ﺗﺤﺖ )أﻋﲆ‬
‫وأﺳﻔﻞ(‬
‫)ﻧﺼﻒ(‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻎ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻴﻎ إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ اﳌﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫ﻓﻴام ﻳﲇ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎت اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﻋﲆ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫• ‪Dolby Digital‬‬
‫• ‪*Dolby Digital Plus‬‬
‫• ‪*Dolby TrueHD‬‬
‫• ‪DTS‬‬
‫• ‪DTS96/24‬‬
‫• ‪*DTS-HD Master Audio‬‬
‫• ‪*DTS-HD High Resolution Audio‬‬
‫• ‪*DTS-HD Low Bit Rate‬‬
‫• ﺧﻄﻲ ‪ 48 Linear PCM 2ch‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ أو أﻗﻞ‬
‫• أﻗﴡ ‪ Linear PCM‬ﺧﻄﻲ ‪ 192 7.1ch‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ أو‬
‫أﻗﻞ*‬
‫*‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﳌﻤﻜﻦ إدﺧﺎل ﻫﺬه اﻟﺼﻴﻎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪33AR‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﻷزرار ‪/MENU‬‬
‫‪) BACK‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(14‬‬
‫‪) ‬اﺧﺘﻴﺎر(‪/ ENTER /‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ‬أو ‪ ‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﺑﻨﻮد اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﻹدﺧﺎل اﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮع إﱃ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪.BACK‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﻷزرار ‪) ‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت( –‪+*/‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﻷزرار ‪) SW ‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ( –‪+/‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪) ‬ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت(‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪل ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﻟﺰر ‪CLEARAUDIO+‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎر ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﳌﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪) SOUND FIELD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(9‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪) VOICE‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(9‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪) PAIRING‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(6‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪) NIGHT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(9‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪) INPUT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(6‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪) /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد(‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪DIMMER‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﻄﻮع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ‪ ‬ﻣﻌﺘﻢ ‪ ‬إﻳﻘﺎف‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮع اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﲆ »إﻳﻘﺎف« ﺳﺘﻨﻄﻔﺊ‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ أن ﺗﻌﺮض ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺪة ﺛﻮان‪.‬‬
‫‪32AR‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎر وﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ميﺘﻠﻚ اﻟﺰر ‪ + ‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻠﻤﻮﺳﺔ‪ .‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﳌﺆﴍ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪) /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد(‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪) LINK‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(22‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎيئ اﳌﱰدد‬
‫‪31AR‬‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎيئ اﳌﱰدد‬
‫اﳌﻨﻔﺬ ‪ HT-CT780) UPDATE‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ANALOG IN‬‬
‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪(TV) DIGITAL IN‬‬
‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪HDMI IN 3‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪30AR‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪HDMI IN 1‬‬
‫‪ HT-CT780‬ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪.HDCP 2.2‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪HDMI IN 2‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪(ARC) HDMI OUT‬‬
‫‪ HT-CT780‬ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪.HDCP 2.2‬‬
‫دﻟﻴﻞ اﻷﺟﺰاء وﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﳌﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت‪ ،‬ارﺟﻊ اﱃ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎت ﺑني اﻻﻗﻮاس‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎت اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ واﻟﻌﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍ ‪) BLUETOOTH‬أزرق(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫– أﺛﻨﺎء إﻗﺮان ‪ :BLUETOOTH‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ‬
‫– ﻣﺤﺎوﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ :BLUETOOTH‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫– ﺗﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ :BLUETOOTH‬ﻳﴤء‬
‫– وﺿﻊ اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ‪) BLUETOOTH‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎ(‪ :‬ﻣﻨﻄﻔﺊ‬
‫‪29AR‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪) /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد(‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪) INPUT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(19 ،6‬‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪) PAIRING‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(6‬‬
‫اﻷزرار ‪+/– VOLUME‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪) N‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(7‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،NFC‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ NFC‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫إعادة الضبط‬
‫إذا استمر النظام يف العمل بشكل غري صحيح‪ ،‬قم بإعادة‬
‫ضبط النظام كالتايل‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬اضغط ‪( /‬تشغيل‪/‬استعداد) لتشغيل النظام‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2 2‬اضغط ‪.MENU‬‬
‫‪3 3‬اخرت ]‪ [SYSTEM‬مع ‪( ‬اخرت)‪ ،‬ثم اضغط‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪4‬اخرت ]‪ [SYS.RST‬مع ‪( ‬اخرت)‪ ،‬ثم اضغط‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫‪5‬عند ظهور ]‪ [START‬عىل شاشة مكرب الصوت‬
‫الطويل‪ ،‬اضغط ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫تظهر ]‪ [RESET‬عىل الشاشة‪ ،‬وتعود إعدادات‬
‫القامئة وحقول الصوت‪ ،‬الخ إىل حالتها األوىل‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬عند اختفاء ]‪ ،[RESET‬قم بفصل سلك التيار‬
‫املرتدد‪.‬‬
‫‪7‬قم بتوصيل سلك التيار الكهربايئ املرتدد‪ ،‬ثم اضغط‬
‫عىل الزر ‪( /‬تشغيل‪/‬استعداد) لتشغيل النظام‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬قم بتوصيل النظام مبضخم الصوت الفرعي‬
‫(صفحة ‪.)22‬‬
‫‪28AR‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫وﺣﺪة اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﰲ وﺳﻂ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ )ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ( ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(29‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ أي ﻋﻮاﺋﻖ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑني ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫واﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪال ﻛﻼ اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺘني ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺘني ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺗني إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺷﺤﻨﺘﻬام ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر اﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ اﻟﺨﺎص ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫أﺧﺮى‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج أي ﺻﻮرة ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﻜﱪ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [S. THRU‬ﻋﲆ ]‪[ON‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(15‬‬
‫إذا ﻇﻬﺮت ]‪) PRTECT‬ﺣامﻳﺔ([ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﳌﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪) /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد( ﻋﲆ ﻣﻜﱪ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬اﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎيئ‬
‫اﳌﱰدد ﺛﻢ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن ﻻ ﳾء ﻳﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎت اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﳌﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﳌﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻻ ﻳﴤء‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ DIMMER‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻟﺴﻄﻮع ﻋﲆ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ أو‬
‫ﻣﻈﻠﻢ إذا ﻛﺎن ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎ ﻋﲆ إﻳﻘﺎف اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(32‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮات اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻌﻴﻖ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ اﳌﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮات‬
‫)ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ اﻟﺴﻄﻮع( وﺟﻬﺎز اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﰲ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن أو »اﳌﺮﺳﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎرات ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد‬
‫)إرﺳﺎل ﺑﺎﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ اﻟﺤﻤﺮاء(« ﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﺛﻼيث‬
‫اﻷﺑﻌﺎد ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﻨﻈﺎرات ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ اﻷﺑﻌﺎد أو اﻻﺗﺼﺎل‬
‫اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﻴﺪا ﻋﻦ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﰲ ﻧﻄﺎق ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻬﺬه اﻷﺟﺰاء ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﻮاﻗﻊ اﳌﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮات وﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫‪27AR‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟـ ‪ HDMI‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) HDMI‬راﺟﻊ دﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟـ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻹﻋﺪاد‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎيئ اﳌﱰدد‪،‬‬
‫اﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻷﻛرث ﻣﻦ ‪ 15‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن أي ﺟﻬﺎز ﻣﻮﺻﻮل ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰاﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫"‪."BRAVIA‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﻋﺪادات اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟـ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫اﳌﻮﺻﻮل‪ .‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫اﳌﻮﺻﻮل‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﻊ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻏري ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪر‬
‫أي ﺻﻮت ﺑﺴﺒﺐ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟـ ‪ .HDMI‬ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) CTRL‬اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟـ ‪ [(HDMI‬ﰲ‬
‫]‪ [HDMI‬ﻋﲆ ]‪) [OFF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (15‬أو ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﴍة إﱃ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﻮع وﻋﺪد اﻷﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﻲ ميﻜﻦ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻣﺰاﻣﻨﺔ "‪ "BRAVIA‬ﻣﺤﺪودة مبﻘﻴﺎس‬
‫‪ HDMI CEC‬ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪:‬‬
‫– ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة )ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ‪ ،Blu-ray Disc‬ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫‪ ،DVD‬اﻟﺦ(‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪3‬‬
‫– أﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ ،Blu-ray Disc‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬
‫‪ ،DVD‬اﻟﺦ(‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪3‬‬
‫– أﺟﻬﺰة ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﳌﻮاﻟﻒ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪4‬‬
‫– ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺼﻮت )ﺟﻬﺎز اﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل‪/‬ﺳامﻋﺔ رأس(‪ :‬ﻳﺼﻞ‬
‫إﱃ ‪) 1‬ﻳﺸﻤﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم(‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪر أي ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ BLUETOOTH‬اﳌﻮﺻﻮل‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﺿﺎءة اﳌﺆﴍ ‪) BLUETOOTH‬أزرق(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(29‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم وﺟﻬﺎز ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻬام‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ وﺟﻮد ﺟﻬﺎز ﻳﻮﻟﺪ إﺷﻌﺎﻋﺎ ﻛﻬﺮوﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠيك‪ ،‬أﺟﻬﺰة ‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫أﺧﺮى‪ ،‬أو ﻓﺮن ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮووﻳﻒ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎد اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫ﻋﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈزاﻟﺔ أي ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﺑني ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم وﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪ BLUETOOTH‬أو ﻧﻘﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﻌﻴﺪا ﻋﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴري ﻣﻮﻗﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪ BLUETOOTH‬اﳌﻮﺻﻮل‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺎول ﺗﻐﻴري اﻟﱰدد اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺟﻪ ‪،Wi-Fi‬‬
‫اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ إﱃ ﻧﻄﺎق ‪ 5‬ﻏﻴﻐﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز ‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫اﳌﻮﺻﻮل‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﻏري ﻣﺘﺰاﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻷﻓﻼم‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻊ ﺗﺄﺧري‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك ﳌﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳامع أي ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ أﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎص مبﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺆﴍ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﻻ ﻳﴤء‪.‬‬
‫– ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ أﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎص مبﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎم‪.‬‬
‫– اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪) /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد( ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺆﴍ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺒﻂء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن‬
‫اﻷﺧﴬ أو ﻳﴤء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ إﱃ ﻣﻜﺎن‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﴤء ﻣﺆﴍ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺧﴬ‪.‬‬
‫– اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ﰲ »وﺻﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم )اﻟﻮﺻﻞ مبﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ(« )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(22‬‬
‫– اﻓﺤﺺ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ]‪ [RF CHK‬ﻟﻠﻘﺎمئﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(16‬‬
‫‪26AR‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﴍ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن‬
‫اﻷﺧﴬ‪.‬‬
‫– ارﺟﻊ إﱃ وﻛﻴﻞ ‪ Sony‬اﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺆﴍ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﺑﴪﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن‬
‫اﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬
‫– اﺿﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪) /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد( ﰲ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻹﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ واﻓﺤﺺ إذا‬
‫ﻣﺎ متﺖ إﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﰲ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ أم ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮت‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮي ﻣﺼﺪر اﻹدﺧﺎل ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺜري ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮت ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛام ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ أﻏﻠﺐ‬
‫اﻟﱪاﻣﺞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ميﻜﻦ ﺳامع ﺻﻮت ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬
‫اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪) SW ‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ( ‪ +‬ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺰﻳﺎدة‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(32‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ اﻟﺼﻮت أو ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬إذا ﻛﺎن ﻫﻨﺎك ﺟﻬﺎز ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻳﻮﻟﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺎت‬
‫إﻟﻜﱰوﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ أو ﻓﺮن‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮووﻳﻒ ﺑﺼﺪد اﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪام‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪا ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬إذا ﻛﺎن ﻫﻨﺎك ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﺑني ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ وﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ أو إزاﻟﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ وﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺄﻗﺮب ﻣﺎ ميﻜﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴري ﺗﺮدد ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻷي ﻣﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺮﻳﺐ أو ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﴢ إﱃ ﻧﻄﺎق ‪5‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴري اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ ،Blu-ray Disc‬اﻟﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬اﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ إﱃ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮت أو ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳامع ﺻﻮت ذو ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﺪا ً‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪) SW ‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت( ‪ +‬ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﺰﻳﺎدة ﻣﺴﺘﻮى‬
‫ﺻﻮت ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(29‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن ﻣﺆﴍ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﻋﲆ ﻣﻜﱪ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻳﴤء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺧﴬ‪ .‬وإﻻ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ »ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳامع أي ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ« ﰲ‬
‫»اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك ﳌﺼﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ«‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(26‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻹﻧﺘﺎج ﺻﻮت‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﺎدر إدﺧﺎل ﺗﺤﺘﻮي ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎت ﺻﻮت ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ )ﻣﺜﻼ ﺑﺚ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن(‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺳامع اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻜﻮن ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺣامﻳﺔ ﺣﻘﻮق‬
‫اﻟﻨﺴﺦ )‪ ،(HDCP‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاﺟﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ إﻛامل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪.BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﺿﺎءة اﳌﺆﴍ ‪) BLUETOOTH‬أزرق(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(29‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫ﻣﺆﴍ‬
‫‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫)أزرق(‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﴪﻋﺔ‬
‫أﺛﻨﺎء إﻗﺮان ‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻳﺤﺎول اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻗﺎم ﺑﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫ﻳﴤء‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬
‫‪) BLUETOOTH‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎ(‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻔﺊ‬
‫‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪ BLUETOOTH‬اﻟﺬي ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ وﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم وﺟﻬﺎز ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻬام‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻗﺮان ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم وﺟﻬﺎز ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﻣﺮة‬
‫أﺧﺮى‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎج إﱃ إﻟﻐﺎء اﻹﻗﺮان ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ BLUETOOTH‬أوﻻ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [BT PWR‬ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﲆ ]‪ ،[OFF‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﲆ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(15‬‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ إﺟﺮاء اﻹﻗﺮان‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم وﺟﻬﺎز ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻬام )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(6‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻻ ﻳﺘﻠﻘﻰ ﺗﺪاﺧﻼ ﻣﻦ أﺟﻬﺰة‬
‫‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ أو أﺟﻬﺰة ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ أﺧﺮى ﺑﱰدد ‪2.4‬‬
‫ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ أو ﻓﺮن ﻣﻴﻜﺮووﻳﻒ‪ .‬إذا ﻛﺎن ﺟﻬﺎز ﻳﻮﻟﺪ‬
‫اﻹﺷﻌﺎع اﻟﻜﻬﺮوﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﴘ ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎن ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪا ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪25AR‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻻ ميﻜﻦ اﻟﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺤﻴﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬وﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺷﺎرة اﻹدﺧﺎل وإﻋﺪاد ﺣﻘﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﻌﺎل‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﺨﻔﻴﺎ‪ ،‬وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ أو اﻟﻘﺮص‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮت ﻣﺘﻌﺪد اﻟﻘﻨﻮات‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ‬
‫إﻋﺪاد إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻮل‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻮل‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮي اﻟﺨﻠﻞ وإﺻﻼﺣﻪ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫اذا واﺟﻬﺖ أي ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣام ﻳﲇ أﺛﻨﺎء اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎرﺟﻊ إﱃ دﻟﻴﻞ اﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎف اﻷﺧﻄﺎء وإﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮل ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪة ﺑﺸﺄن ﻋﻼج اﳌﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻃﻠﺐ إﺟﺮاء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت‬
‫إﺻﻼح‪ .‬إذا اﺳﺘﻤﺮت اي ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬اﺳﺘﴩ وﻛﻴﻞ ‪Sony‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎم‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﻓﺤﺺ ان ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎيئ اﳌﱰدد ﻣﻮﺻﻮل ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺼﻮرة ﻋﺎدﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎيئ اﳌﱰدد ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻴﺎر ﻋﲆ اﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﻋﺪ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺪة دﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻻ ﺗﺰال وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎيئ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪ .‬اﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫]‪ [A. STBY‬ﰲ ]‪ [SYSTEM‬ﻋﲆ ]‪[OFF‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(16‬‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺰر ‪ INPUT‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻌﺮض ]‪ [TV‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )راﺟﻊ‬
‫دﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن أوﻻ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫إﻋﺪاد ﻣﻜﱪات اﻟﺼﻮت ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن )‪ (BRAVIA‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺼﻮت‪ .‬راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻹﻋﺪاد اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬أو ﻛﺎﺑﻞ رﻗﻤﻲ ﺿﻮيئ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز أو ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﻮت ﻣﻮﺻﻮل إﱃ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم واﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫)راﺟﻊ دﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎدة ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن أو إﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪24AR‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﻨﺎة ﻋﻮدة‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت )‪ (ARC‬ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻮﺻﻠﺔ إدﺧﺎل ‪ (ARC) HDMI‬ﰲ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫)راﺟﻊ دﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻖ(‪ .‬إذا ﺗﻮاﺻﻞ ﻋﺪم‬
‫إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت أو اﻧﻘﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ اﻟﺒﴫي‬
‫اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ اﳌﺮﻓﻖ وﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [ARC‬ﻋﲆ ]‪ [OFF‬ﰲ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) .(15‬راﺟﻊ دﻟﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻖ ﺣﻮل‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪(.‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻏري ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﻨﺎة ﻋﻮدة‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت )‪ ،(ARC‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ اﻟﻀﻮيئ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻋﱪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)راﺟﻊ دﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬
‫إذا مل ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار أي ﺻﻮت ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ اﻹﺧﺮاج اﻟﺒﴫي‬
‫اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ أو ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻏري ﻣﺠﻬﺰ مبﻘﺒﺲ إﺧﺮاج‬
‫ﺑﴫي رﻗﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ أو ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻘﻤﺮ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﴍة إﱃ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ (TV) DIGITAL IN‬ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم واﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن اﻟﺼﺎدر ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬إذا ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [SYNC‬ﻋﲆ ]‪ ،[ON‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﲆ‬
‫]‪) [OFF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(14‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة اﻷﻓﻼم‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻊ ﺗﺄﺧري‬
‫ﺑﺴﻴﻂ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺼﻮرة‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﻊ أي ﺻﻮت أو ﻳﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮت مبﺴﺘﻮى ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﺪا‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻮل مبﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﱪ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪) ‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت( ‪ +‬ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ وﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(29‬‬
‫‪ ‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪) ‬ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت( أو ‪) ‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮى‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت( ‪ +‬ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء وﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺘﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(29‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر ﻣﺼﺪر اﻹدﺧﺎل ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ أن ﺗﺠﺮب ﻣﺼﺎدر إدﺧﺎل أﺧﺮى ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪ INPUT‬ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺪة ﻣﺮات‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(6‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ أن ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻛﺎﺑﻼت وأﺳﻼك اﻟﻨﻈﺎم واﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫اﳌﻮﺻﻮل ﻣﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎت‬
‫ﻧﺒﺬة ﻋﻦ اﻷﻣﺎن‬
‫• إذا ﺳﻘﻂ أي ﺟﺴﻢ ﺻﻠﺐ أو ﺳﺎﺋﻞ داﺧﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم واﻓﺤﺼﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ أﺷﺨﺎص ﻣﺆﻫﻠني ﻓﻨﻴًﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﺪدا‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺴﻠﻖ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ وﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻘﻂ وﺗﺠﺮح ﻧﻔﺴﻚ أو ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﴬر اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ أي ﳾء ﺧﻠﻒ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ وﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻪ أن ﻳﺴﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎت اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ وﻳﺴﺒﺐ أﻋﻄﺎﻻ‪.‬‬
‫• ﰲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺪﻣﺎج ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن أو ‪ VCR‬أو‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆدي ذﻟﻚ إﱃ ﺣﺪوث ﺿﻮﺿﺎء وﻗﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺪﻫﻮر ﺟﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮرة‪ .‬ﰲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬه اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫ﺑﻌﻴﺪا ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن أو ‪ VCR‬أو ﻣﺴﺠﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮخ اﻟﺤﺬر ﻋﻨﺪ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﲆ ﺳﻄﺢ متﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺎص )اﻟﺸﻤﻊ أو اﻟﺰﻳﺖ أو اﻟﺪﻫﺎﻧﺎت اﳌﺼﻘﻮﻟﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ(؛ ﻓﻘﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺆدي ذﻟﻚ إﱃ ﻇﻬﻮر ﺑﻘﻊ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺴﻄﺢ أو ﺗﻐري ﻟﻮﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺣﺮص ﻋﲆ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ أي إﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ أرﻛﺎن ﻣﻜﱪ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ وﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫• اﺗﺮك ﻓﺮاﻏﺎ مبﻘﺪار ‪ 3‬ﺳﻨﺘﻤﱰات أو أﻛرث ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ أن ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻹﻣﺪادات اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﳌﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺸﺎر إﱃ ﻓﻮﻟﻄﻴﺔ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻻﺳﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺠﺰء اﻟﺴﻔﲇ ﳌﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻟﻔﱰة زﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮص‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎيئ اﳌﱰدد‪ ،‬اﻣﺴﻚ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ؛ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺤﺐ اﻟﺴﻠﻚ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﻮن أﺣﺪ ﻧﺼﲇ اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ أﻋﺮض ﻣﻦ اﻵﺧﺮ ﻷﻏﺮاض اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫وميﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ مبﺄﺧﺬ اﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ واﺣﺪة ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬إذا مل‬
‫ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﰲ اﳌﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻌني ﺗﻐﻴري ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎيئ اﳌﱰدد ﰲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻓﻨﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل اﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﻋﲆ اﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ إﻻ أن ذﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻼً وﻇﻴﻔﻴًﺎ‪ .‬إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم مبﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻛﺒري‬
‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮاﺻﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮف ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ اﻟﺨﻠﻒ‬
‫واﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒري‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺮق ﻧﻔﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫اذا ﻛﺎن ﻟﺪﻳﻚ اي ﺳﺆال او ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻣﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺸﺎرة وﻛﻴﻞ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪ Sony‬اﻟﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﺣﺪث ﺗﺸﻮه أﻟﻮان ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻫﺎت اﻷﻟﻮان ميﻜﻦ أن ﺗﺤﺪث ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻷﻧﻮاع ﻣﻦ أﺟﻬﺰة‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫• إذا متﺖ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺗﺸﻮه أﻟﻮان‪...‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺠﺪدا ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫‪ 15‬إﱃ ‪ 30‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا متﺖ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺗﺸﻮه أﻟﻮان ﻣﺠﺪدا‪...‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺸﻜﻞ أﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗامش ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ وﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ اي‬
‫ﻧﻮع ﻣﻦ اﻟﻠﺒﺎد اﻟﻜﺎﺷﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺤﻮق اﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ او ﻣﻮاد ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻜﺤﻮل او اﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﻣﻜﺎن اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫• ﺿﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎن ﺟﻴﺪ اﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﳌﻨﻊ ارﺗﻔﺎع درﺟﺔ ﺣﺮارة‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم وﺟﻌﻞ ﻋﻤﺮ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم أﻃﻮل‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﺤﺮارة أو ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎن ﻳﺘﻌﺮض‬
‫ﻷﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ اﳌﺒﺎﴍة واﻟﻐﺒﺎر اﳌﻔﺮط أو اﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎت‬
‫اﳌﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪23AR‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻮل ازدﻳﺎد اﻟﺤﺮارة‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز آﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫أﻓﻘﻴﺎ )‪ HT-CT380‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫وﺻﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم )اﻟﻮﺻﻞ مبﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ(‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻷميﻦ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮن ﺷﻌﺎر "‪ "SONY‬ﰲ اﻻﺗﺠﺎه اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮاء اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك ﳌﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺪدا‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺣﺸﻴﺎت ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪22AR‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.MENU‬‬
‫اﺧﱰ ]‪ [WS‬ﻣﻊ ‪) ‬اﺧﱰ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫اﺧﱰ ]‪ [LINK‬ﻣﻊ ‪) ‬اﺧﱰ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر ]‪ [START‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ [SEARCH‬وﻳﻘﻮم ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ميﻜﻦ اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ‪ .Link‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫إﱃ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﰲ ﻏﻀﻮن دﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Link‬أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫‪.BACK‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ LINK‬ﻋﲆ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﴤء اﳌﺆﴍ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﻋﲆ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮن اﻷﺧﴬ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ [OK‬ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻜﱪ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻇﻬﺮت ]‪ ،[FAILED‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻀﺨﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت وﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﺟﺮاء ﻣﺠﺪدا ﻣﻦ اﻟﺨﻄﻮة ‪.1‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.MENU‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻄﻔﺊ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺣﻀﺎر ﺑﺮاﻏﻲ )ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺜﻘﻮب ﰲ‬
‫اﳌﺸﺎﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﲆ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ مبﻮازاة اﻟﺜﻘﻮب ﰲ اﳌﺸﺎﺑﻚ ﻣﻊ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﲆ اﻟﱪﻏﻴني‪.‬‬
‫أﻛرث ﻣﻦ ‪ 30‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 4.5‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫ﺛﻘﺐ ﰲ اﳌﺸﺒﻚ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺪ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ إﱃ ﻣﺜﺒﺘني ﰲ اﻟﺠﺪار‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﱪﻏﻴﺎن ﺑﺎرزﻳﻦ مبﻘﺪار ‪ 5‬ﻣﻢ إﱃ ‪6‬‬
‫ﻣﻢ‪.‬‬
‫وﻇﺎﺋﻒ أﺧﺮى‬
‫‪ 777.5‬ﻣﻢ )‪(HT-CT380‬‬
‫‪ 876‬ﻣﻢ )‪(HT-CT780‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ﻣﻢ إﱃ‬
‫‪ 6‬ﻣﻢ‬
‫‪21AR‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺣﻀﺎر ﺑﺮاﻏﻲ )ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ( ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﳌﺎدة وﻗﻮة اﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪.‬‬
‫مبﺎ أن اﻟﺠﺪار اﻟﺠﴢ ﻫﺶ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎص‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎم ﰲ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﻲ أزرار ﰲ إﻃﺎر اﻟﺠﺪار‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ أﻓﻘﻴﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ ﰲ اﳌﺜﺒﺘني ﻋﲆ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﺴﻄﺢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮاﺻﻞ ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺠﺪار‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻃﻠﺐ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻦ وﻛﻼء ‪ Sony‬أو ﻣﻘﺎوﻟني ﻣﺮﺧﺺ‬
‫ﻟﻬﻢ‪ ،‬وإﻳﻼء اﻫﺘامم ﺧﺎص ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ Sony‬ﻏري ﻣﺴﺆوﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺤﻮادث أو اﻷﴐار اﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺴﺒﺒﻬﺎ‬
‫اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ اﻟﺨﺎﻃﺊ أو ﻗﻮة اﻟﺠﺪار ﻏري اﻟﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ أو اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫اﻟﺨﺎﻃﺊ ﻟﻠﱪاﻏﻲ أو اﻟﻜﻮارث اﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻚ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﰲ‬
‫ﺛﻘﻮب ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﳌﺸﺎﺑﻚ أﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﱪاﻏﻲ اﳌﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻜﻮن أﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻚ اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار ﻛام ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒني ﰲ اﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﺒيك اﻟﱰﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار ﰲ ﺛﻘﻮب‬
‫اﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﻴﴪى واﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ أﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎل ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪HT-CT780 :‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎيئ اﳌﱰدد‬
‫ﺑﺮﻏﻲ )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﻣﺸﺒﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﺪار‬
‫)ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪20AR‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻘﻔﻞ اﻷﺑﻮي‬
‫ﺳﻮف ﻳﺘﻢ إﺑﻄﺎل اﻷزرار ﻋﲆ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء‬
‫اﻟﺰر ‪) /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد(‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ INPUT‬ﻋﲆ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﺤﻮاﱄ‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺛﻮان ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ [LOCKED‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻘﻔﻞ اﻷﺑﻮي‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ INPUT‬ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‬
‫ﻟﺤﻮاﱄ ‪ 5‬ﺛﻮان ﻟﻌﺮض ]‪.[UNLOCK‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻹﻋﺪادات اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫– ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [CTRL‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI‬ﻋﲆ ]‪) [OFF‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(15‬‬
‫– ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [S. THRU‬ﰲ ]‪ [HDMI‬ﻋﲆ ]‪[AUTO‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(15‬‬
‫وﻇﺎﺋﻒ أﺧﺮى‬
‫‪19AR‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﻣﺰاﻣﻨﺔ‬
‫"‪"BRAVIA‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ أﻳﻀﺎ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ اﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟـ ‪ Sony‬اﳌﺪرﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎت ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰاﻣﻨﺔ "‪."BRAVIA‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰاﻣﻨﺔ "‪ "BRAVIA‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﺳﻮف ﻳﺘﻢ ﺧﻔﺾ اﺳﺘﻬﻼك اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﰲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎف إرﺳﺎل إﺷﺎرة ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﻨﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﱪ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ‪ *HDMI‬ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﲆ ]‪) [AUTO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(15‬اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ ﻫﻮ‬
‫]‪.[AUTO‬‬
‫إذا ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن آﺧﺮ ﻏري "‪ ،"BRAVIA‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻋﲆ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(15‬‬
‫*‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﱪ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻹﺧﺮاج اﻹﺷﺎرات‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻟﻬﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن ﰲ‬
‫وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت ﺣﻮل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎت اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫• اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﺎﱄ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ‪ .‬إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎري‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮض ‪ ،1080p‬ﻟﻮن‬
‫داﻛﻦ ‪ ،Deep Color‬ﻋﺮض ‪ ،3D‬وﻣﺤﺘﻮى ‪ 4K‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪم ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﺎﱄ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ ﺑﺸﻌﺎر ﻧﻮع اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﻧﻮﴆ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ‪.HDMI-DVI‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻮل ﺑﺸﺄن وﺟﻮد ﺻﻮرة‬
‫ﺿﻌﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺠﻮدة أو ﺻﻮت ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪر ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻮل‬
‫ﻋﱪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫• إﺷﺎرات اﻟﺼﻮت )ﻋﻴﻨﺔ اﻹﺷﺎرة‪ ،‬ﻃﻮل اﻟﺒﺖ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ( اﳌﺮﺳﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻮل‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﻘﻄﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴري ﻋﻴﻨﺔ اﻹﺷﺎرة أو ﻋﺪد ﻗﻨﻮات‬
‫إﺷﺎرات إﺧﺮاج اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻮل ﻏري ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺣامﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﺴﺦ )‪ ،(HDCP‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺸﻮه اﻟﺼﻮرة و‪/‬أو اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﰲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم أو ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪر‪ .‬ﰲ‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ مبﺮاﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻮل‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر "‪ "TV‬ﻛﻤﺼﺪر إدﺧﺎل ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج‬
‫إﺷﺎرات اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﱪ أﺣﺪ اﳌﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪HDMI IN 1/2/3‬‬
‫اﳌﺨﺘﺎر اﳌﺮة اﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪.HDMI OUT‬‬
‫‪18AR‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻳﺪﻋﻢ إرﺳﺎل ‪ Deep Color‬و‬
‫"‪ "x.v.Colour‬و‪ 3D‬و‪4K‬‬
‫• ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع مبﺤﺘﻮى ‪ ،3D‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺻﻞ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض ‪ 3D‬وﺟﻬﺎز ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬
‫)ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ ،"PlayStation®4" ،Blu-ray Disc‬اﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﺑﻼت ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ ووﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎرات ‪ 3D‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Blu-ray Disc‬ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫اﻟﻌﺮض ‪.3D‬‬
‫• ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﳌﺤﺘﻮى ‪ ،4K‬ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫وأﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﺘﻮى‬
‫‪.4K‬‬
‫وﻇﺎﺋﻒ أﺧﺮى‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟـ‬
‫‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟـ ‪ ،HDMI‬وﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟـ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪) HDMI‬ﻧﻮع ﻋﺎﱄ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ‬
‫اﳌﻴﺰات ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟـ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪CTRL‬‬
‫)اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟـ ‪ [(HDMI‬ﻋﲆ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(15‬اﻹﻋﺪاد‬
‫اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫اﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم واﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻮل ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺴﻴﻨام اﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺴﻴﻨام اﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﺳﻮف ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫اﳌﻮﺻﻮل‪ .‬ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴري إدﺧﺎل اﻟﻨﻈﺎم أو ﺗﻐﻴري ﺣﻘﻮل اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪ .‬ميﻜﻨﻚ أﻳﻀﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ إﻋﺪادات ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت أو ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﻟﺼﻮت ﰲ‬
‫ﻣﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ أو اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﺎﱄ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ أو ﺻﻮت‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ أو اﻟﻠﻴﻞ أو ﺛﻨﺎيئ أﺣﺎدي أو ﻣﺰاﻣﻨﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت‪/‬‬
‫اﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ أن ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻗﺎدرا ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل إﱃ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ اﻟﻨﻄﺎق ﻻﺳﺘﻌامل وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺴﻴﻨام اﳌﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ اﳌﻴﺰات اﳌﺬﻛﻮرة ﺑﺎﻷﻋﲆ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻣﻌني‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻹﻋﺪادات اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﻮﺻﻮل‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻟـ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ارﺟﻊ إﱃ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺼﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﻴﻨام ﺗﻜﻮن ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻮف ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﱪات اﻟﺼﻮت ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن ﺻﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﺻﺎدرا ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﱪات اﻟﺼﻮت ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ اﳌﺮة اﻷﺧرية اﻟﺘﻲ ﺷﺎﻫﺪت ﻓﻴﻬﺎ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎة ﻋﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت )‪(ARC‬‬
‫إذا ﻛﺎن اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪Audio Return‬‬
‫‪ ،(ARC) Channel‬ﺳﻮف ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ اﻻﺳﺘامع ﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﱪات اﻟﺼﻮت ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ARC‬ﻣﻔﻌﻠﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪) ARC‬ﻗﻨﺎة ﻋﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت([‬
‫ﻋﲆ ]‪) [ON‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(15‬اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ ﰲ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫‪17AR‬‬
‫وﻇﺎﺋﻒ أﺧﺮى‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟـ ‪ HDMI‬ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎر وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻣﺘﺒﺎدل‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪم ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮف ‪Consumer) HDMI CEC‬‬
‫‪ (Electronics Control‬ﻟـ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)‪.(High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ واﺣﺪة‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز )ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪،Blu-ray Disc‬‬
‫"‪ ،"PlayStation®4‬اﻟﺦ( اﳌﻮﺻﻮل ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﺎﱄ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن اﳌﻮﺻﻮل‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ وﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴري إﺷﺎرة اﻹدﺧﺎل ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎم ﻹدﺧﺎل ‪HDMI‬‬
‫اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮد اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫]‪[SYSTEM‬‬
‫)اﻟﻨﻈﺎم(‬
‫]‪[A. STBY‬‬
‫)اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﺗﻠﻘﺎيئ(‬
‫]‪) [VER‬اﻹﺻﺪار(‬
‫]‪[SYS.RST‬‬
‫)إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز(‬
‫]‪*[UPDATE‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ(‬
‫]‪[WS‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮت ﻻﺳﻠيك(‬
‫*‬
‫]‪[LINK‬‬
‫]‪[RF CHK‬‬
‫)ﻓﺤﺺ ‪(RF‬‬
‫‪ HT-CT780‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪16AR‬‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮى اﺳﺘﻬﻼك اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪم‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻟﺤﻮاﱄ ‪ 20‬دﻗﻴﻘﺔ وﻋﺪم ﺗﻠﻘﻲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻹﺷﺎرة إدﺧﺎل‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﺸﻐّﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد اﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎيئ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺻﺪار اﻟﱪﻧﺎﻣﺞ اﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ اﻟﺤﺎﱄ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ إﻋﺎدة ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ واﻹﻋﺪادات )ﺣﻘﻮل اﻟﺼﻮت‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ( ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎم إﱃ اﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻷوﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(28‬‬
‫ﺳﻮف ﻳﺘﻢ اﻹﻋﻼن ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺜﺎت ﻋﲆ اﳌﻮﻗﻊ اﻹﻟﻜﱰوين ﻟـ ‪ .Sony‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎع اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴامت ﻋﲆ اﳌﻮﻗﻊ اﻹﻟﻜﱰوين‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ وﺻﻞ ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(22‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ إذا ﻛﺎن ميﻜﻦ ﻟﻨﻈﺎم اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎم اﻻﺗﺼﺎل أم ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OK‬ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[NG‬ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮد اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫]‪[AUDIO‬‬
‫]‪[STREAM‬‬
‫]‪[HDMI‬‬
‫]‪[CTRL‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮت(‬
‫)ﺗﺪﻓﻖ(‬
‫)اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟـ ‪(HDMI‬‬
‫]‪[S. THRU‬‬
‫)ﻋﱪ‪-‬اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد(‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮض ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت ﻋﻦ ﺗﺪﻓﻖ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺤﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫اﻧﻈﺮ اﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ 34‬ﺣﻮل ﺻﻴﻎ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟـ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬اﺧﱰ ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ﻏري‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟـ ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ وﺿﻊ ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﱪ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ‪.HDMI‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[AUTO‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬
‫وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻳﺤﻔﻆ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﻣﻘﺎرﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ اﻹﻋﺪاد ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﺧﺮاج إﺷﺎرات ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ أي ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن آﺧﺮ ﻏري "‪ ،"BRAVIA‬اﺳﺘﺨﺪم اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻣﻊ اﻹﻋﺪاد ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫]‪[SET BT‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪(BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫]‪[BT PWR‬‬
‫)ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ‪(BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [CTRL‬ﻋﲆ ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ أو إﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﰲ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫]‪[BT.STBY‬‬
‫)اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬
‫‪(BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫• إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴري اﻹﻋﺪاد إﱃ ]‪ ،[OFF‬ﺳﻮف ﻳﺘﻢ إﺑﻄﺎل اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎم ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻹﻗﺮان‪ ،‬ﺳﻮف ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬
‫‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ إﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ وﺿﻊ اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ‪.BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺑﻄﺎل وﺿﻊ اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ‪.BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• إذا مل ﻳﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎم ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﻹﻗﺮان‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ اﳌﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ وﺿﻊ اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد‬
‫‪.BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫]‪[AAC‬‬
‫)اﻟﱰﻣﻴﺰ اﳌﺘﻘﺪم ﻟﻠﺼﻮت(‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻮاء ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪ AAC‬ﻋﱪ ‪ BLUETOOTH‬أم ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ON‬اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪم ‪ AAC‬ﻋﱪ ‪.BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• إذا ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴري اﻹﻋﺪاد ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻻ ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪ ،BLUETOOTH‬ﺳﻮف‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﺼﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻋﻦ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫‪15AR‬‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎت واﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼت‬
‫]‪[ARC‬‬
‫)ﻗﻨﺎة ﻋﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت(‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [CTRL‬ﻋﲆ ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻟﻼﺳﺘامع ﻟﻠﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﻨﺎة ﻋﻮدة‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت )‪ (ARC‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮل ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬ﻋﺎﱄ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.ARC‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.ARC‬‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎت واﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼت‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌامل ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﺒﻨﻮد اﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎظ ﺑﺈﻋﺪاداﺗﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎيئ اﳌﱰدد‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) /BACK‬اﺧﺘﻴﺎر(‪ ENTER/‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎر اﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺛﻢ اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ ENTER‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻐﻠﻖ اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻘﻮاﺋﻢ‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎت اﻟﺪاﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﺧﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮد اﻟﻘﺎمئﺔ‬
‫]‪[LEVEL‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮى(‬
‫]‪[TONE‬‬
‫)اﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ(‬
‫]‪[AUDIO‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮت(‬
‫اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫]‪[DRC‬‬
‫)اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﳌﺪى اﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴيك(‬
‫ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼم مبﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ DRC‬ﻋﲆ ﻣﺼﺎدر ‪Dolby‬‬
‫‪.Digital‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ اﳌﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﰲ اﳌﺤﺘﻮى‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[AUTO‬ﻳﻀﻐﻂ اﻟﺼﻮت ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺑﺘﺸﻔري ‪.Dolby TrueHD‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬اﻟﺼﻮت ﻏري ﻣﻀﻐﻮط‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪل ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[BASS‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮت ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ( • ﻧﻄﺎق اﳌﻌﻠّامت ﻣﻦ ]‪ [–6‬إﱃ ]‪ [+6‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎدة مبﻘﺪار ‪.1‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺪل ﻣﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻋﺎﱄ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[TREBLE‬‬
‫• ﻧﻄﺎق اﳌﻌﻠّامت ﻣﻦ ]‪ [–6‬إﱃ ]‪ [+6‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎدة مبﻘﺪار ‪.1‬‬
‫)ﺻﻮت ﻋﺎﱄ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ(‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮن اﻟﺼﻮرة واﻟﺼﻮت ﻏري ﻣﺘﺰاﻣﻨني‪.‬‬
‫]‪[SYNC‬‬
‫)ﻣﺰاﻣﻨﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت واﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ( • ]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺰاﻣﻨﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت واﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬ﻳﻘﻮم ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎف ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺰاﻣﻨﺔ اﻟﺼﻮت واﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺼﻮت إرﺳﺎل ﻣﺘﻌﺪد ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮم اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎل إﺷﺎرة ﺑﺚ ﻣﺘﻌﺪد‬
‫]‪[DUAL‬‬
‫رﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪.Dolby Digital‬‬
‫)أﺣﺎدي ﻣﺰدوج(‬
‫• ]‪ :[M/S‬ﻳﺘﻢ إﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﺋﻴﴘ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻷﻳﴪ وإﺻﺪار اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻷميﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[MAIN‬ﻳﺼﺪر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[SUB‬ﻳﺼﺪر ﻣﻦ اﻟﻘﻨﺎة اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[EFFECT‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[ON‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﻘﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺨﺘﺎر‪ .‬ﻳﻮﴅ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬا اﻹﻋﺪاد‪.‬‬
‫• ]‪ :[OFF‬ﻣﺼﺪر اﻹدﺧﺎل ﻣﻤﺰوج ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻘﻨﺎﺗني‪.‬‬
‫)ﻣﺆﺛﺮ اﻟﺼﻮت(‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [EFFECT‬ﻋﲆ ]‪ ،[OFF‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [EFFECT‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﲆ ]‪[ON‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴري إﻋﺪاد ﺣﻘﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫‪14AR‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI‬ﰲ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ‪ HDCP 2.2‬وﻏري ﻣﻄﺒﻮع ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ‪ARC‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ اﻟﺒﴫي إﱃ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ اﻹﺧﺮاج اﻟﺒﴫي ﰲ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن وﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬إﱃ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ إدﺧﺎل ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪.HDCP 2.2‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ Blu-ray Disc‬أو ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ أو ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻘﻤﺮ اﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪HDCP‬‬
‫‪2.2‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪HDCP‬‬
‫‪2.2‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻣﺤﺘﻮى ‪ 4K‬ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﺤﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﺴﺦ )‪ HT-CT780‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ رﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﴫي )ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻧﻮع ﻋﺎﱄ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻧﻮع ﻋﺎﱄ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫• اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI 1 INPUT‬ﰲ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪.HDCP 2.2‬‬
‫‪13AR‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻣﺤﺘﻮى ‪ 4K‬ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﺤﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﺴﺦ )‪ HT-CT780‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ إﱃ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ‪ 4K‬وأﺟﻬﺰة ‪4K‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮض ﻣﺤﺘﻮى ‪ 4K‬ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﺤﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة ﻋﱪ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ HDCP 2.2‬ﻋﲆ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ميﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻣﺤﺘﻮى ‪ 4K‬ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﺤﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﱪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.HDCP 2.2‬‬
‫راﺟﻊ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﳌﻌﺮﻓﺔ إن ﻛﺎن ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪ HDCP 2.2‬أم ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI‬ﰲ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ‪ HDCP 2.2‬وﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ‪ARC‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ Blu-ray Disc‬أو ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ أو ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻘﻤﺮ اﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪HDCP‬‬
‫‪2.2‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪HDCP 2.2‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻧﻮع ﻋﺎﱄ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻧﻮع ﻋﺎﱄ اﻟﴪﻋﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻏري ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎت‬
‫• اﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ HDMI 1 INPUT‬ﰲ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ‪.HDCP 2.2‬‬
‫• اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) ARC‬ﻗﻨﺎة ﻋﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت( ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﺎ رﻗﻤﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ اﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن إﱃ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم أو ﻣﻀﺨﻢ ﺻﻮت وﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪12AR‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ "‪ "SongPal‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.iPhone/iPod touch‬‬
‫وﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ‪ iPhone/iPod touch‬ﻋﲆ وﺿﻊ‬
‫اﻹﻗﺮان واﺧﱰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم )‪ HT-CT380‬أو‬
‫‪ (HT-CT780‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫‪.iPhone/iPod touch‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﴤء ﻣﺆﴍ ‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫)أزرق( ﰲ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ "‪ "SongPal‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ‪iPhone/‬‬
‫‪ iPod touch‬اﳌﻮﺻﻮل وﺣﻤﻞ ذﻟﻚ اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫‪11AR‬‬
‫وﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ذيك أو ﺟﻬﺎز ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﻲ )‪(SongPal‬‬
‫"‪ "SongPal‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ‬
‫ذيك أو ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫"‪ "SongPal‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ Google Play‬أو‬
‫‪.App Store‬‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻔﻌﻠﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪ [BT PWR‬ﻋﲆ ]‪[ON‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(15‬اﻹﻋﺪاد اﻻﻓﱰاﴈ ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز ‪Android‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد( ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﴤء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ "‪ "SongPal‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪Android‬‬
‫وﺣﻤﻞ ذﻟﻚ اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ "‪ "SongPal‬ﺛﻢ اﺗﺒﻊ اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴامت ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫• إذا ﻇﻬﺮت ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،NFC‬راﺟﻊ »اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ واﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ Android‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ NFC‬اﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ )‪.«(NFC‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،Android‬اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.PAIRING‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ اﳌﺆﴍ ‪) BLUETOOTH‬أزرق( ﺑﴪﻋﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﻗﱰان ‪.BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫‪10AR‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫اﺧﱰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم )‪ HT-CT380‬أو ‪(HT-CT780‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎمئﺔ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﰲ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪.Android‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﴤء ﻣﺆﴍ ‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫)أزرق(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪Android‬‬
‫اﳌﻮﺻﻮل‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ واﺣﺪة ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪ Android‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ NFC‬اﳌﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫)‪(NFC‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ اﻟﺨﻄﻮات ‪ 1‬إﱃ ‪ 3‬ﰲ »ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪.«Android‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻇﻬﻮر ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،Android‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪Android‬‬
‫ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ N‬ﻋﲆ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﴤء ﻣﺆﴍ ‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫)أزرق(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪.Android‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ‪iPhone/iPod touch‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪) /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬اﺳﺘﻌﺪاد( ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﴤء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪.PAIRING‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ اﳌﺆﴍ ‪) BLUETOOTH‬أزرق( ﺑﴪﻋﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﻗﱰان ‪.BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺛﺮات اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫)وﺿﻊ اﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﻘﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ SOUND FIELD‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﻘﻞ‬
‫اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺮﻏﻮب ﻋﲆ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻟﻌﺮض اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[CLEARAUDIO+‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ اﺧﺘﻴﺎر إﻋﺪاد اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﳌﺼﺪر اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫]‪[STANDARD‬‬
‫ﻳﻮاﻓﻖ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺼﺪر‪.‬‬
‫]‪[MOVIE‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺻﻮات ﻣﻊ اﳌﺆﺛﺮات اﳌﺤﻴﻄﺔ اﻟﻮاﻗﻌﻴﺔ واﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣام ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼم‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ أﺻﻮات ﻣﺤﺴﻨﺔ مبﺆﺛﺮات اﻟﺼﻮت ووﺿﻮح‬
‫اﻟﺤﻮار‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ NIGHT‬ﻟﻌﺮض ]‪.[N. ON‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ NIGHT‬ﻟﻌﺮض‬
‫]‪.[N. OFF‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ميﻜﻨﻚ اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺤﻘﻮل اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﱪﻣﺠﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‬
‫واﳌﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻷﻧﻮاع ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﺼﻮت‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ وﺿﻊ اﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺼﻮت ﻋﲆ ﺟﻌﻞ اﻟﺤﻮارات أﻛرث وﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ VOICE‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﻌﺮض اﻟﻨﻮع اﳌﺮﻏﻮب‪.‬‬
‫]‪[TYPE 1‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ إﺧﺮاج ﻧﻄﺎق اﻟﺤﻮار ﻣﺒﺎﴍة‪.‬‬
‫]‪[TYPE 2‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻄﺎق اﻟﺤﻮار‪.‬‬
‫]‪[TYPE 3‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﻧﻄﺎق اﻟﺤﻮار وﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ أﺟﺰاء ﺻﻮت ﻋﺎﱄ اﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫مبﺴﺘﻮى ﺻﻮت ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ اﻟﺬي ﻣﻦ اﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺳامﻋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﻛﺒﺎر اﻟﺴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[SPORTS‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻖ واﺿﺢ وﺗﺴﻤﻊ اﻟﻬﺘﺎﻓﺎت ﻛﺼﻮت ﻣﺤﻴﻂ واﻷﺻﻮات‬
‫واﻗﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[GAME‬‬
‫اﻷﺻﻮات واﻗﻌﻴﺔ وﻗﻮﻳﺔ وﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺐ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[MUSIC‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻷﺻﻮات ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺠﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺎ وﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬
‫‪ Blu-ray Disc‬أو ‪.DVD‬‬
‫]‪) P.AUDIO‬ﺻﻮت ﻣﺤﻤﻮل([‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﺤﻤﻮل‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌامل ‪.*DSEE‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪ DSEE‬ﻫﻲ اﺧﺘﺼﺎر ﳌﺤﺮك ﺗﺤﺴني اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫)‪ ،(Digital Sound Enhancement Engine‬وﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻧﻄﺎق ﻋﺎل واﺳﱰداد ﺻﻮت رﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﻄﻮرة ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪.Sony‬‬
‫‪9AR‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫• إذا ﺗﻌﺬر اﻻﻗﱰان وﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،BLUETOOTH‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ إﺟﺮاء ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﲇ‪.‬‬
‫– أﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ "‪ "NFC Easy Connect‬وﺣ ّﺮك‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﺒﻂء ﻓﻮق ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪.N‬‬
‫– اﻧﺰع اﻟﺼﻨﺪوق ﻋﻦ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ إذا ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪم‬
‫ﺻﻨﺪوق ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ اﳌﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﰲ اﻷﺳﻮاق‪.‬‬
‫‪8AR‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع ﳌﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﳌﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ إﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ،BLUETOOTH‬ﺳﻮف ﺗﻈﻬﺮ إﺷﺎرة‬
‫ﺗﻄﻠﺐ أي ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻪ وﻓﻘﺎ ﻷي ﺟﻬﺎز ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺒﺎع اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴامت اﳌﻌﺮوﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻳﺴﻤﻰ "‪ "SongPal‬اﻟﺬي ميﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫راﺟﻊ »اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ذيك أو ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ )‪) «(SongPal‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(10‬‬
‫اﺟﻬﺰة ﺑﻌﻴﺪة ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫أﺟﻬﺰة ﺑﻌﻴﺪة ﻣﺰودة ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬
‫)ﻧﻈﺎم اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ Android 2.3.3 :‬أو اﻹﺻﺪارات‬
‫اﻷﺣﺪث‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ‪(Android 3.x‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ وﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫"‪ "NFC Easy Connect‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ INPUT‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر ﻟﻌﺮض ]‪.[BT‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ اﳌﺆﴍ ‪) BLUETOOTH‬أزرق( أﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺤﺎوﻟﺔ‬
‫اﻗﱰان ‪.BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ ،BLUETOOTH‬اﺧﱰ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫)‪ HT-CT380‬أو ‪.(HT-CT780‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﺿﺎءة اﳌﺆﴍ ‪) BLUETOOTH‬أزرق(‪.‬‬
‫اﺑﺪأ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪.BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ اﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﰲ ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺪول‪/‬اﳌﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﻞ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ N‬ﻋﲆ‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻬﺘﺰ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫اﻻﺗﺼﺎل ﺑﺠﻬﺎز ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ واﺣﺪة )‪(NFC‬‬
‫ﺑﺤﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز ﺑﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮب ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ N‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺎﺑﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم واﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ اﺳﺘﻜامل‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ اﻻﻗﱰان واﺗﺼﺎل ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﺿﺎءة اﳌﺆﴍ ‪) BLUETOOTH‬أزرق(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎت‬
‫• ميﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎز واﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﰲ وﻗﺖ واﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• وﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺬيك‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮن ﻣﻦ اﻟﴬوري ﺿﺒﻂ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪ NFC‬ﻋﲆ وﺿﻊ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪ .‬ارﺟﻊ اﱃ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫اﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ اﻟﺬيك‪.‬‬
‫‪7AR‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع ﻟﻠﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ™‪،Blu-ray Disc‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪/‬اﻟﻘﻤﺮ اﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫اﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ ‪ INPUT‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮر‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪ INPUT‬ﻣﺮة واﺣﺪة‪ ،‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫اﻟﺤﺎﱄ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ اﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬وﺑﻌﺪ ذﻟﻚ ﻳﺘﻐري اﻟﺠﻬﺎز دورﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ اﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺰر ‪ INPUT‬ﰲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮة ﻛﺎﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪.‬‬
‫]‪[HDMI 3]  [HDMI 2]  [HDMI 1]  [TV‬‬
‫‪[BT]  [ANALOG] ‬‬
‫]‪[TV‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز رﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻮل مبﻘﺒﺲ ‪ (TV) DIGITAL IN‬أو ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮاﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ وﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻨﺎة ﻋﻮدة اﻟﺼﻮت ﻣﻮﺻﻮل مبﻘﺒﺲ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪(ARC) OUT‬‬
‫]‪[HDMI 3] [HDMI 2] [HDMI 1‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ‪ ،Blu-ray Disc‬اﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺻﻮل مبﻘﺒﺲ ‪HDMI IN 1‬‬
‫أو ‪ 2‬أو ‪3‬‬
‫]‪[ANALOG‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ﺗﻨﺎﻇﺮي ﻣﻮﺻﻮل ﺑﺎﳌﻘﺒﺲ ‪ANALOG IN‬‬
‫]‪[BT‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪A2DP‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ‬
‫• إذا ﺗﻢ إﺑﻄﺎل اﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪ ،BLUETOOTH‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫]‪ [BT OFF‬ﻋﻮﺿﺎ ﻋﻦ ]‪.[BT‬‬
‫‪6AR‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫إﻗﺮان ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫اﻹﻗﺮان ﻫﻮ إﺟﺮاء ﴐوري ﻹﻧﺸﺎء راﺑﻂ ﺑني أﺟﻬﺰة‬
‫‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﻟﻠﺴامح ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ إﻗﺮان‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﻗﺒﻞ اﻟﺒﺪء ﰲ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫مبﺠﺮد إﻗﺮان اﻷﺟﻬﺰة ‪ ،BLUETOOTH‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ أي ﴐورة‬
‫ﻹﻗﺮاﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺮة أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫اﺿﻐﻂ ‪ PAIRING‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ اﳌﺆﴍ ‪) BLUETOOTH‬أزرق( ﺑﴪﻋﺔ أﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫اﻗﱰان ‪.BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ اﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﺛﻢ اﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ اﻷﺟﻬﺰة واﺧﱰ ﻫﺬا‬
‫اﻟﻨﻈﺎم )‪ HT-CT380‬أو ‪.(HT-CT780‬‬
‫إذا ﺗﻢ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻔﺘﺎح اﳌﺮور‪ ،‬أدﺧﻞ "‪."0000‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ إﺿﺎءة اﳌﺆﴍ ‪) BLUETOOTH‬أزرق(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻢ إﻧﺸﺎء اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬
‫• ميﻜﻨﻚ إﻗﺮان ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ إﱃ ‪ 9‬أﺟﻬﺰة ‪.BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫إذا ﺗﻢ إﻗﺮان ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ BLUETOOTH‬اﳌﺎﴍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺒﺪال أﻗﺪم ﺟﻬﺎز ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪول اﳌﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎت‬
‫ﺣﻮل اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪ ‬دﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺪء اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬه‪4 .........................‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع ﻟﻠﺼﻮت ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ™‪،Blu-ray Disc‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪/‬اﻟﻘﻤﺮ اﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻲ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ‪6 ............‬‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘامع ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎز‬
‫‪6 ..................................BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ اﻟﺼﻮت‬
‫اﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎع ﺑﺎﳌﺆﺛﺮات اﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫)وﺿﻊ اﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﺔ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ(‪9 ..............................‬‬
‫وﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﰲ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ذيك أو‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎز ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﻲ )‪10 ...... (SongPal‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪة ﻣﺤﺘﻮى ‪ 4K‬ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺑﺤﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫)‪ HT-CT780‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﰲ وﺿﻊ اﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪاد ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪19 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﲆ اﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ‪20 .....‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ أﻓﻘﻴﺎ‬
‫)‪ HT-CT380‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‪22 ..........................‬‬
‫وﺻﻞ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‬
‫)اﻟﻮﺻﻞ مبﻀﺨﻢ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ(‪22 ..........‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎت إﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫اﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎت ‪23 ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮي اﻟﺨﻠﻞ وإﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪24.................................‬‬
‫دﻟﻴﻞ اﻷﺟﺰاء وﻋﻨﺎﴏ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪29.......................‬‬
‫ﺻﻴﻎ اﻟﺼﻮت اﳌﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ‪33 ................................‬‬
‫اﳌﻮاﺻﻔﺎت‪35 ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل اﺗﺼﺎل ‪37 ..................... BLUETOOTH‬‬
‫‪END USER LICENSE‬‬
‫‪38...............................AGREEMENT‬‬
‫اﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ إﱃ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮن ‪ 4K‬وأﺟﻬﺰة ‪12 .......... 4K‬‬
‫اﻟﻀﺒﻮﻃﺎت واﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼت‬
‫اﺳﺘﻌامل ﺷﺎﺷﺔ اﻹﻋﺪاد‪14 ................................‬‬
‫وﻇﺎﺋﻒ أﺧﺮى‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟـ ‪17............... HDMI‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻣﻮاﺻﻔﺎت ﻣﺰاﻣﻨﺔ "‪18 ...... "BRAVIA‬‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪام وﻇﻴﻔﺔ اﻟﻘﻔﻞ اﻷﺑﻮي‪19 ......................‬‬
‫‪5AR‬‬
‫ﺣﻮل ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬه‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻨﺎول اﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﻮاردة ﰲ ﺗﻌﻠﻴامت اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬه ﺑﴩح‬
‫اﻷزرار ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ميﻜﻨﻚ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام‬
‫أزرار اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ إذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻧﻔﺲ اﻷﺳامء اﳌﻮﺟﻮدة ﻋﲆ ﺟﻬﺎز اﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ أو‬
‫أﺳامء ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺾ اﻟﺮﺳﻮم اﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﺮﺳﻮم ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬وميﻜﻦ أن‬
‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ اﳌﻨﺘﺠﺎت اﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪4AR‬‬
‫‪ Apple‬وﺷﻌﺎر ‪ Apple‬و ‪ iPhone‬و ‪ iPod‬و ‪iPod‬‬
‫‪ touch‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Apple Inc.‬ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﰲ اﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎت اﳌﺘﺤﺪة وﺑﻠﺪان أﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫‪ App Store‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬
‫"‪ "x.v.Colour‬واﻟﺸﻌﺎر "‪ "x.v.Colour‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪.Sony Corporation‬‬
‫"®‪ "PlayStation‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.Sony Computer Entertainment Inc.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ واﻷﺳامء اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ اﻷﺧﺮى ﻫﻲ ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫اﳌﻌﻨﻴني‪.‬‬
‫"‪ ،"Made for iPod‬و "‪ "Made for iPhone‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫أن اﻻﻛﺴﺴﻮار اﻹﻟﻜﱰوين ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ‬
‫ﻟﺠﻬﺎز ‪ iPod‬أو ‪ iPhone‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺘﻮاﱄ‪ ،‬وﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺼﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ اﳌﻄﻮر ﻟﺘﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳري اﻷداء ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Apple .Apple‬ﻏري ﻣﺴﺆوﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﺠﻬﺎز أو‬
‫ﺗﻮاﻓﻘﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳري اﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ واﳌﻌﺎﻳري اﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ أن اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻫﺬا اﻻﻛﺴﺴﻮار ﻣﻊ ﺟﻬﺎز ‪ iPod‬أو‬
‫‪ iPhone‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﲆ اﻷداء اﻟﻼﺳﻠيك‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻨﻊ ﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪iPod/iPhone‬‬
‫اﳌﻮدﻳﻼت ‪ iPod/iPhone‬اﳌﺘﻮاﻓﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﲆ اﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬
‫اﻟﺘﺎﱄ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ‪ iPod/iPhone‬ﻷﺣﺪث ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫اﺳﺘﺨﺪاﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ اﻟﻨﻈﺎم‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ BLUETOOTH‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻊ‪:‬‬
‫‪iPhone 3GS/iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/‬‬
‫‪iPhone 5/iPhone 5c/iPhone 5s/‬‬
‫‪iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus‬‬
‫‪) iPod touch‬اﻟﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺨﺎﻣﺲ(‪/‬‬
‫‪) iPod touch‬اﻟﺠﻴﻞ اﻟﺮاﺑﻊ(‬
‫"‪ "BRAVIA‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.Sony Corporation‬‬
‫"‪ "DSEE‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.Sony Corporation‬‬
‫"‪ "ClearAudio+‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪.Sony Corporation‬‬
‫‪3AR‬‬
‫اﻟﻜﺎﺑﻼت اﳌﻮﴅ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫‪HT-CT380‬‬
‫‪TRA‬‬
‫‪REGISTERED No: ER37065/15‬‬
‫‪DEALER No: DA0096946/12‬‬
‫‪HT-CT780‬‬
‫‪REGISTERED No: ER37064/15‬‬
‫‪DEALER No: DA0096946/12‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺮﻛّﺐ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز ﰲ ﻣﻜﺎن ﻣﺤﺼﻮر‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺰاﻧﺔ اﻟﻜﺘﺐ او‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻴﻨﺔ داﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮب ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺎت ﺗﻬﻮﻳﺔ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‬
‫ﺑﻮرق اﻟﺼﺤﻒ‪ ،‬اﻏﻄﻴﺔ اﳌﺎﺋﺪة‪ ،‬اﻟﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ‪ ،‬اﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌ ّﺮض اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﱃ ﻣﺼﺎدر اﻟﻠﻬﺐ اﳌﻜﺸﻮﻓﺔ )ﻋﲆ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫اﳌﺜﺎل‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﻮع ﻣﺸﺘﻌﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻧﺸﻮب ﺣﺮﻳﻖ او اﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ اﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻌ ّﺮض‬
‫اﻟﺠﻬﺎز اﱃ ﻗﻄﺮات او ارﺗﺸﺎق اﻟﺴﻮاﺋﻞ‪ ،‬وﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ اﺟﺴﺎم‬
‫ﻣﻤﻠﻮءة ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻮاﺋﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ اﳌﺰﻫﺮﻳﺎت‪ ،‬ﻋﲆ اﻟﺠﻬﺎز‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬه اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻏري ﻣﻔﺼﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻃﺎﳌﺎ اﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر اﳌﱰدد ‪ ،AC‬ﺣﺘﻰ اذا ﻛﺎﻧﺖ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‬
‫ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ اﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻن ﻗﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻔﺼﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻦ‬
‫اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬اوﺻﻞ اﻟﻮﺣﺪة ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﻴﺎر ﻣﱰدد ‪AC‬‬
‫ﺳﻬﻞ اﻟﻮﺻﻮل اﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬اذا ﻻﺣﻈﺖ اي ﳾء ﻏري ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﰲ‬
‫اﻟﻮﺣﺪة‪ ،‬اﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ اﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ اﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ اﻟﺘﻴﺎر‬
‫اﳌﱰدد ‪ AC‬ﻓﻮرا ً‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌ ّﺮض اﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت او اﻻﺟﻬﺰة واﻟﺒﻄﺎرﻳﺎت ﻣﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﺪاﺧﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺮارة اﻟﺰاﺋﺪة‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ اﺷﻌﺔ اﻟﺸﻤﺲ واﻟﻨﺎر‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﰲ اﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ اﳌﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪2AR‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﳌﻜﱪ اﻟﺼﻮت اﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ اﻻﺳﻢ ﰲ اﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ اﻟﺴﻔﲇ‪.‬‬
‫‪TRA‬‬
‫‪AR‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ اﺳﺘﺨﺪام ﻛﺎﺑﻼت وﻣﻮﺻﻼت ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ وﻣﺆرﺿﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰة اﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ اﳌﻀﻴﻔﺔ و‪/‬أو اﻷﺟﻬﺰة‬
‫اﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﴩ و اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت اﻟﺘﺠﺎرﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ‪Dolby* Digital‬‬
‫و ‪.DTS** Digital Surround System‬‬
‫* ﻣﺼﻨﻊ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﱪات ‪Dolby‬‬
‫‪.Laboratories‬‬
‫‪ Dolby‬واﻟﺮﻣﺰ اﳌﺰدوج‪ D-‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ‬
‫ﳌﺨﺘﱪات ‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬
‫** راﺟﻊ ‪ http://patents.dts.com‬ﺣﻮل ﺑﺮاءات‬
‫اﺧﱰاع ‪ .DTS‬ﻣﺼﻨﻊ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ DTS .DTS Licensing Limited‬و ‪DTS-HD‬‬
‫واﻟﺮﻣﺰ و & ‪ DTS‬واﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﻣﻌﺎً ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪ .DTS, Inc.‬ﺣﻘﻮق اﻟﻨﴩ © ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ .DTS, Inc.‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ اﻟﺤﻘﻮق ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ اﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ®‪ BLUETOOTH‬واﻟﺸﻌﺎرات ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت‬
‫ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ متﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪Bluetooth SIG, Inc.‬‬
‫واي اﺳﺘﻌامل ﻟﻬﺬه اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎت ﺑﻮاﺳﻄﺔ ﴍﻛﺔ ‪Sony‬‬
‫‪ Corporation‬ﻫﻮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬا اﻟﻨﻈﺎم ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪High-Definition‬‬
‫)™‪.Multimedia Interface (HDMI‬‬
‫اﳌﺼﻄﻠﺢ ‪ HDMI‬و ‪HDMI High-Definition‬‬
‫‪ ،Multimedia Interface‬واﻟﺸﻌﺎر ‪ HDMI‬ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ او ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﴩﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ HDMI Licensing LLC‬ﰲ اﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎت اﳌﺘﺤﺪة واﻟﺒﻠﺪان‬
‫اﻻﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫اﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ N‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ او ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪ NFC Forum, Inc.‬ﰲ اﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎت اﳌﺘﺤﺪة اﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‬
‫وﰲ اﻟﺒﻠﺪان اﻻﺧﺮى‪.‬‬
‫™‪ Android‬و ™‪ Google Play‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎت ﺗﺠﺎرﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﴩﻛﺔ ‪.Google Inc.‬‬
Sound Bar
©2015 Sony Corporation
Printed in Malaysia
4-570-575-12(1)
HT-CT380/CT780
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement